JP7200490B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine is known that includes base means and displacement means displaceably disposed on the base means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-130539 A

However, the game machine exemplified above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of optimizing the displacement of the displacement means .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably displacing displacement means .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises base means and displacement means displaceably disposed on the base means, wherein one of the base means and the displacement means is provided. and a guide portion formed on the other of the base means and the displacement means for guiding the guided part, wherein the displacement means has a first direction and the first direction is Displaceable from a first position to a second position by displacing in a predetermined direction having a directional component in the first direction and a directional component in the second direction by an operation in any one of different second directions. The guided portion is configured such that when the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position by the operation in the first direction, and when the displacement means is displaced in the second position by the operation in the second direction. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with different regions of the guide portion depending on whether it is displaced from the first position to the second position. When displacing from the first position to the second position, the region of the guide portion where the guided portion is guided by the guide portion by the operation in the first direction or the guided portion by the operation in the second direction. A guide portion is formed so as to be able to abut on a region of the guide portion guided by the guide portion, and the displacement means can be operated in the second direction while operating the displacement means in the first direction. , by displacing in the predetermined direction, it is possible to displace from the first position to the second position along substantially the same trajectory as when the displacement means is operated in either the first direction or the second direction. , and the displacement means is formed so that at least the central portion of the operation portion in the operation direction view when the displacement means is operated in one of the first direction and the second direction is formed into a curved shape.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the displacement of the displacement means can be favorably performed .

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective front view of a slot machine with its front door closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective front view of a slot machine with its front door opened; FIG. FIG. 10 is a perspective rear view of the front door with the reel unit opened from the front door to the rear side; It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is an exploded perspective view of a frame unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows a pattern arrangement|sequence. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a selector. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front door. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front door. (a) is a front view of the displacement unit, (b) is a side view of the displacement unit in the XIIIb direction of FIG. 13(a), and (c) is the XIIIc-XIIIc line of FIG. 13(a) 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the displacement unit in FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the displacement unit; (a) is a front view of the operation unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit as viewed in direction XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is a rear view of the operation unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the operation unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit; 4 is an exploded perspective view of the grasping unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of the guide unit, (b) is a perspective front view of the guide unit, (c) is a perspective rear view of the guide unit, and (d) is a ) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit taken along line XXd-XXd of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the guide unit, and (b) is an exploded sectional view of the guide unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is XXIIc- of FIG. 22D is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit taken along line XXIIc, and FIG. 22D is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit taken along line XXIId-XXIId in FIG. (a) is a perspective front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is XXIIIc- of FIG. 23D is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit taken along line XXIIIc, and FIG. 23D is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit taken along line XXIIId-XXIIId in FIG. 23(a); (a) is a perspective front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is XXIVc- of FIG. 24(d) is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit along line XXIVd-XXIVd of FIG. 24(a); FIG. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit and the guide unit. (a) is a front view of the base unit, (b) is a perspective front view of the base unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc of FIG. 27(a). . 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the base unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of the base unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29(a). 30(a) is a front view of the displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the displacement unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement unit taken along line XXXc-XXXc in FIG. 30(a). It is a front view of a base unit. 31. (a) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 31, and (b) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 27(a) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 27(a), and (b) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 27(a); It is a diagram. FIG. 4 is a perspective exploded view of the displacement unit; (a) to (c) are front views of the base unit. It is a front view of a base unit. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the base unit; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the base unit; FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of a base unit in a second embodiment. 39(a) to 39(c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the base unit along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a). (a) is a front view of a base unit in a third embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XLIb-XLIb in FIG. 41(a), and (c) is FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XLIc-XLIc in (a); (a) is a front view of a base unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42(a). (a) is a front view of a base unit in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43(a). (a) is a front view of the displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the displacement unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement unit taken along XLIVc-XLIVc in FIG. 44(a). (a) to (c) are front views of the base unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the base unit along line XLVIa-XLVIa in FIG. 45(a), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(a). be. 46(e) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XLVIe-XLVIe of FIG. 46(a). (a) is a front view of a base unit in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the base unit, and (c) is a view of the base unit along line XLVIIc-XLVIIc in FIG. 47(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a base unit in a seventh embodiment; (a) is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit in an eighth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an operation unit and a guide unit. (a) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. It is a model diagram. (a) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. It is a model diagram. (a) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. It is a model diagram. (a) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. It is a model diagram. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of an operation unit and a guide unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) is a side view of the operation unit in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55(a). 4 is an exploded perspective view of the grasping unit; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of an operation unit and a guide unit, and (c) and (d) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit. (a) and (b) are side views of an operation unit and a guide unit, and (c) and (d) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit. (a) is a front view of a guide unit in an eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of a guide unit in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of a guide unit in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a guide unit in a fifteenth embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 38. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment. 2 is a perspective front view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open. FIG. 4 is a perspective rear view of the front door 12 with the reel unit 41 opened from the front door 12 to the rear side. 5 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG. Note that FIG. 1 illustrates a state in which the game panel 30 disposed on the front side of the auxiliary display section 15 is removed. In FIG. 1, effective line display portions 32, 33, and 34, which will be described later, are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

Further, in the following description, the front side of the paper surface is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is defined as the rear (rear) side of the slot machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Furthermore, with respect to the slot machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the vertical direction, horizontal direction, and front-back direction of the slot machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the housing 11 includes a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left side plate 11d, and a right side plate 11e which are formed like wooden plates. By fixing the through 11e by fixing means such as adhesion, the whole is formed in a box shape with one side open on the front side (arrow F direction side). Each of the plates 11a to 11e may be made of a synthetic resin material or a metal material to form an integral box shape instead of being made of a wooden panel. The housing 11 constructed as described above is attached to a so-called island facility by, for example, driving a nail into it when it is installed in a game hall.

Further, on the bottom plate 11b of the housing 11, a metal plate 11b1 made of a plate-like body is arranged on the inner surface of the housing 11 on the open side (arrow F direction side). As a result, when the front door 12, which will be described later, is arranged on the front (open) side of the housing 11, a part of the front door 12 can be placed on the metal plate 11b1. It is possible to prevent the bottom plate 11b from becoming brittle due to rubbing. Further, by arranging a part of the front door 12 on the front side of the metal plate 11b1, the front door 12 can be supported by the bottom surface 11b of the housing 11 (that is, the metal plate 11b1 can be used as reinforcement). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the support shafts 25a and 25b of the housing 11 and the support metal fittings 26a and 26b of the front door 12, which will be described later, from being damaged.

A front door 12 as a front opening/closing door is attached to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the housing 11 so as to be able to be opened and closed. That is, as shown in FIG. 6, the left side plate 11d of the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a and 25b. The support shafts 25a and 25b have tapered shaft portions protruding upward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the front door 12 is provided with support metal fittings 26a and 26b having shaft support holes corresponding to the shafts 25a and 25b into which the shaft portions of the shafts 25a and 25b are inserted. It is By lowering the front door 12 after placing the support metal fittings 26a and 26b above the respective support shafts 25a and 25b, the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support metal fittings 26a and 26b. It is assumed that the As a result, the front door 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD) connecting the support shafts 25a and 25b. 11 can be opened or closed.

In the following description, the state in which the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 as shown in FIG. A state in which the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 (a state in which the open surface of the housing 11 is opened) as shown in FIG. 3 will be described as an open state. Further, in the following description, the closed state in which the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 will be described unless otherwise specified.

The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device provided on the rear surface thereof. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a key cylinder 20 of an unlocking operation portion is provided at the lower portion (arrow D direction portion) of the right end side (arrow R direction side) of the front door 12 . The key cylinder 20 is integrated with a locking device, and is configured to be unlocked by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 20 . Therefore, the outline of the locking mechanism including the locking device will be described.

A locking device is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 on the right end side, that is, on the side opposite to the opening/closing shaft of the front door 12 (the side in the direction of arrow R). As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the locking device consists of a base frame that extends vertically and is fixed to the front door 12, and a key cylinder 20 that extends forward of the front door 12 from the top of the base frame. , and an elongated interlocking rod 21 assembled so as to be vertically movable with respect to the base frame. Of the locking devices, only the key cylinder 20 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front door 12 . In this embodiment, the key cylinder 20 is Omlock (trade name), which has a high unauthorized unlocking prevention function.

The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking rod 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hook fittings 22 having a hook shape. is locked by the support fitting 23 (see FIG. 6). The hook 22 is provided with an urging member such as a coil spring for urging the hook 22 to maintain the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the hook 22 is moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state with the support fitting 23 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

An auxiliary display section 15 and a reel unit 41 are arranged below the auxiliary display section 15 via a game panel 30 in the upper center portion (direction of arrow U) of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). . In the following description, the area in which the reel unit 41 can be visually recognized through the game panel 30 from the lower side of the liquid crystal frame member 600 (see FIG. 12) in which the auxiliary display section 15 is arranged is referred to as the "visible area". called.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 41 is attached inside a frame unit 45 formed by combining a plurality of plate members in a frame shape. A speaker 46 for outputting sound is arranged on the upper portion of the frame unit 45 . In addition, the speaker 46 is arranged with its sound output surface directed toward the back side, and the sound output from the speaker 46 is echoed inside the housing 11 . As a result, the sound can be transmitted to the player from the entire slot machine 10, and the player can be easily entertained by the sound.

A pair of upper and lower second support shafts 45a and 45b are provided on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the frame unit 45 (see FIG. 7). The second support shafts 45a and 45b have tapered shaft portions protruding downward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the front door 12 is provided with support fittings 26c and 26d having shaft support holes corresponding to the respective shafts 45a and 45b into which the shaft portions of the support shafts 45a and 45b are inserted. It is By lowering the frame unit 45 after placing the support shafts 45a and 45b above the support metal fittings 26c and 26d, the shaft portions of the support shafts 45a and 45b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support metal fittings 26c and 26d. It is assumed that the As a result, the frame unit 45 is rotatably supported with respect to the front door 12 about an opening/closing axis along (parallel to) the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) connecting the support shafts 45a and 45b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, by rotating the front door 12 to the front side (direction of arrow F) with respect to the housing 11 and then rotating the frame unit 45 to the rear side (direction of arrow B), The front side of the frame unit 45 (reel unit 41) can be opened.

The reel unit 41 includes a left reel 42L, a middle reel 42M, and a right reel 42R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R need only be configured as endless belts, and are not limited to cylindrical (annular) shapes. Each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is rotatably supported such that its central axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally. Further, when the reels 42L, 42M, 42R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are viewed by the player through the game panel 30 as if they are moving from top to bottom.

These reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are connected to stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, respectively, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are individually driven by the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R. and can be driven to rotate. Since these reels 42L, 42M and 42R have the same structure, the right reel 42R will be described here as an example with reference to FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the frame unit 45. FIG.

The right reel 42R includes a cylindrical skeleton member 50 that forms a cylindrical cage, and a belt-like belt that is endlessly wound around its outer peripheral surface. The belt is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 50 via a pair of seal portions formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt. A boss portion 51 is formed in the central portion of the cylindrical frame member 50, and is attached to the drive shaft of the right reel stepping motor 61R via a disk-shaped boss reinforcing plate 52. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the right reel stepping motor 61R rotates, the cylindrical frame member 50 rotates around the drive shaft, and the right reel 42R rotates along the reel surface of the ring. It has become.

The right reel stepping motor 61R is fixed by a screw 54 to the side surface of a motor plate 53 arranged in an upright state within the reel unit 41 (FIG. 4). The motor plate 53 is provided with a reel index sensor (rotational position detection sensor) 55 in which a light emitting element 55a and a light receiving element 55b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a base end portion 56b of a radially extending sensor cut bang 56 is fixed by a screw 57 to the boss reinforcing plate 52 integrated with the right reel 42R. A leading end portion 56a of the sensor cut bang 56 is bent substantially at a right angle and positioned so as to pass between the elements 55a and 55b of the reel index sensor 55. As shown in FIG. Each time the left reel 42R rotates once, the reel index sensor 55 detects the passage of the leading end 56a of the sensor cut bang 56, and each detection signal is output to the main controller 131, which will be described later. Therefore, the main controller 131 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel 42L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 61R is set to rotate once by applying a drive signal (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; the same shall apply hereinafter) of 504 pulses, for example. The rotational position of the reel 42L is controlled.

On each belt of each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R, a plurality of patterns, specifically 21 patterns are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Based on the number of pulses from when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 is output, it is possible to recognize which pattern is visible from the visible region, and to recognize the state in which an arbitrary pattern is visible from the visible region. It is possible to perform control such as recognizing whether or not it is, and making an arbitrary pattern visible from the visible area.

Among the symbols attached to each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the number of symbols that can be viewed as a whole through the game panel 30 from below the liquid crystal frame member 600, which will be described later, mainly depends on the length of the visible region in the vertical direction. Limited to a determined number. In this embodiment, each reel has three pieces. Therefore, when all the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible to the player.

Here, the symbols attached to each reel 42L, 42M, 42R will be described. FIG. 8 shows the pattern arrays drawn on the belts wound around the left reel 42L, the middle reel 42M, and the right reel 42R. As shown in the figure, each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. Numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to the respective reels 42L, 42M, 42R, but these are for convenience of explanation and are not actually attached to the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. . However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

As symbols, there are a "7" symbol (for example, the 20th left belt) and a "youth" symbol (for example, the 19th left belt) as a first special symbol for shifting to the big bonus game. In addition, there is a "BAR" symbol (for example, left belt 14th) as a second special symbol for shifting to the regular bonus game. In addition, there is a "replay" symbol (for example, left belt 11th) as a third special symbol for shifting to a replay game in which the next game can be executed without inserting medals. In addition, a "watermelon" pattern (for example, the 9th left belt), a "bell" pattern (for example, the 8th left belt), a "cherry" pattern (for example, the left belt No. 4). As shown in FIG. 7, the number and arrangement order of various patterns are completely different on the belts wound around the respective reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the reel unit 41 are an example of a display device that variably displays identification information, and the display device may have a configuration other than this. For example, other mechanical reel configurations such as a type in which the belt is circulated instead of rotating may be used, and a liquid crystal display or dot matrix display may be used instead of or in addition to the mechanical reel configuration. It is also possible to provide a variable display of the identification information by means of an electrical display such as the one shown in FIG.

On the game panel 30, the patterns of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R that are visually recognized from the visible area are connected, and there are three lines in parallel in the horizontal direction and two lines in the crossing direction in the diagonal direction, for a total of five combination lines. is attached. Of course, the maximum number of combination lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5, and the maximum number of combination lines may be changed according to predetermined conditions. Effective line display portions 32, 33 and 34 are provided corresponding to these combination lines. The first effective line display section 32 displays and notifies by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (central line) of the combination lines is activated. The second effective line display section 33 displays and notifies by lighting or the like when upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are enabled. The third effective line display section 34 displays and notifies by lighting or the like when a pair of oblique lines (a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line) of the combination lines are activated. Then, when the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line, a prize is won, and predetermined medal payout processing, transition processing to a specific game, and the like are executed.

In this embodiment, when each of the effective line display units 32, 33, and 34 is activated, each effective line is indicated by an issuing device such as an LED disposed on the motor plate 53 of the reel unit 41. The part to be illuminated is illuminated.

Here, the number of payouts for each symbol in the case of winning will be described. Regarding small winning symbols, 15 medals will be paid out if "Watermelon" symbols are aligned left, middle, and right on the effective line, and if "Bell" symbols are aligned left, center, and right on the effective line. 8 medals are paid out, and two medals are paid out when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the effective line. That is, the "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are irrelevant to medal payout. In addition, as far as the "cherry" symbol is concerned, medals are paid out regardless of the combination with other symbols. When the "Cherry" symbol stops, the medals are paid out by the number multiplied by the number of the overlapping valid lines, and as a result, 4 medals are paid out in this embodiment.

As for other symbols, if the "7" symbol or the "young man" symbol, which is a combination of the first special symbol (big bonus symbol), is aligned on the effective line with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right. 15 medals are also paid out when the "BAR" pattern, which is a combination of the 15 medals and the second special pattern (regular bonus pattern), is aligned on the left, middle and right on the effective line. In this embodiment, for example, there may be a case where the "7" symbol and the "cherry" symbol are established at the same time, but in such a case, 15 medals are paid out. This is because the upper limit number of medals for one payout is set to 15 medals.

Further, when the "replay" symbols, which are a combination of the third special symbols, are aligned on the activated line in the left, middle and right directions, medals are not paid out. In other cases, that is, when the "cherry" pattern on the left reel 42L does not stop on the effective line, and when the same patterns on the left, middle, and right do not line up on the effective line, the medal is dispensed. is not performed.

On the lower left side of the game panel 30, as shown in FIG. 1, there is provided a start lever 71 operated to start rotating the reels 42L, 42M, 42R all at once (not necessarily at the same time). . The start lever 71 constitutes a starting operation means for starting rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R, that is, starting operation for starting the variable display of symbols. The start lever 71 is a lever that the player pushes by hand when starting a game, and automatically returns to the original position after the hand is released by a built-in spring. When the start lever 71 is operated while medals are inserted, the reels 42L, 42M and 42R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 71, as shown in FIG. 1, button-like stop switches 72, 73, 74 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R. there is Each stop switch 72, 73, 74 is arranged directly below the reels 42L, 42M, 42R to be stopped, respectively. The stop switches 72, 73, 74 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 enters a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 42L started rotating. It informs you that it can be operated, and turns off when the rotation stops.

At the lower right side of the visible area, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal slot 75 for inserting medals as game media for playing a game is provided. The medal slot 75 constitutes a slot capable of accepting game media. In addition, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 75 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal slot 75 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

As shown in FIG. 4, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by a selector 83 provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 . The selector 83 is provided with a medal passage switching member 84, which will be described later, so that the passing direction of medals can be switched between the ejection passage 82 side and the storage passage 81 side according to the state of the medal passage switching member 84. It's becoming The medals guided to the storage passage 81 are guided to a hopper device 91 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 82 are guided from the medal discharge port 17 provided in the front lower part of the front door 12 to the medal receiving tray 18 and returned to the player.

A hopper device 91 as payout means for awarding medals to a player is arranged below the reel unit 41 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the hopper device 91 includes a storage tank 92 that stores medals and a payout device 93 that pays out the medals to the player. The payout device 93 discharges medals to an opening 94 provided in the central right portion of the discharge passage 82 and pays out the medals to the medal receiving tray 18 via the discharge passage 82 .

On the right side of the hopper device 91, as shown in FIG. Inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91 , a guide plate 96 is provided for discharging medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95 . Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 96 is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 95 .

Below the medal insertion slot 75, as shown in FIG. 2, a button-like return switch 76 is provided. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pushed when the selector 83 is jammed with medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 75. When the return switch 76 is pushed, the selector 83 is mechanically linked and operated. The medals stuck in the selector 83 are returned from the medal discharge port 17. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, a button-shaped first credit insertion switch 77 for inserting three virtual medals credited as game media is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. there is A second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79 are provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 77 . The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at once, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal.

The credit insertion switches 77 to 79 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 75 . Also, while the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 77 to 79 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. , constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

The first credit insertion switch 77 incorporates a lamp as a light emitting member (not shown) in order to prompt that the maximum number of medals (three) that can be inserted per game has not been reached. The lamp is lit when the switch operation of the first credit insertion switch 77 is valid and prompts the operation of the switch 77, but when there are no credited virtual medals or three medals have already been inserted. is turned off under the following conditions. Here, instead of the above-described lighting, the indicator may be flashed to make it easier for the player to understand the urge to insert medals.

A button-shaped switch 80 is provided on the left side of the start lever 71, as shown in FIG. The change-over switch 80 is configured to be in an ON state when pressed once, and to be in an OFF state when pressed again. The changeover switch 80 is operated to change the handling format of the inserted medals that are inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 in excess of the necessary amount and the won medals that are returned to the player as a result of a predetermined game.

When the change-over switch 80 is in the ON state, the "credit mode" is set so that surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (e.g., 50 medals) or earned medals at the time of winning are accumulated and stored as credit medals. ”. When the change-over switch 80 is in the OFF state, a "direct mode" is set in which the surplus inserted medals and the medals obtained at the time of winning are paid out as actual medals. If there are credit medals when the credit mode is switched to the direct mode, the corresponding credit medals are paid out as actual medals. In this way, the player can play the game in a format that suits his/her taste by switching between the credit mode and the direct mode. The change-over switch 80 constitutes a change-over operation means for switching the handling format of the input value and the game value. In addition, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the changeover switch 80 can be said to constitute settlement operation means for actually paying out the game value that has been stored and stored. In addition to switching between the "credit mode" and the "direct mode" by operating the changeover switch 80, the "credit mode" is always set and when the changeover switch 80 is operated, the stored virtual tokens are paid out. You may make it function as an adjustment switch only.

Below the game panel 30, there is a remaining number display section 35 that displays the number of medals that have been activated and stored during the credit mode, and a remaining number of games, etc., that can be displayed during a special game state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus. and a number-of-games display section 37 for displaying the number of medals won are provided. Although these display units 35 to 37 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Here, the procedure for betting medals will be described. In either the direct mode or the credit mode, a bet is made when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 at the start of the game.

That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the first effective line display section 32 lights up, and the center line corresponding to this becomes the effective line, and the second medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot. 75, the second effective line display part 33 lights up, and a total of three combined lines including the corresponding upper line and lower line become effective lines, respectively, and the third medal is awarded. is inserted into the medal slot 75, the third effective line display section 34 lights up, and a total of five combined lines including a corresponding pair of oblique lines become effective lines.

Further, when four or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, if the mode at that time is the direct mode, the surplus medals exceeding three are switched to the discharge passage 82 by the selector 83, and the medals are discharged. The medals are returned from the outlet 17 to the medal receiving tray 18.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the credit mode, the money is saved inside the slot machine and the number of money saved is displayed on the remaining number display section 35 . An upper limit number is determined for the stored number (for example, 50), and when the number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the medals are returned from the medal outlet 17 to the medal receiving tray 18.例文帳に追加

Further, when the game is played in the credit mode and the accumulated number is displayed on the remaining number display section 35, virtual A bet is made when a medal is inserted.

When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pushed, the numerical value displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by one assuming that one virtual medal has been inserted, and the first effective line display section 32 is displayed. When it lights up, the center line becomes the active line. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pushed, the numerical value displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by two, indicating that two virtual medals have been inserted. Then, the second effective line display section 33 lights up, and a total of three combined lines become effective lines. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pushed, the numerical value displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by three assuming that three virtual medals have been inserted, and all the effective line display sections 32 to 32 are displayed. 34 lights up and a total of 5 combined lines become valid lines.

If the virtual medals to be inserted are not stored when any one of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed, for example, when the display of the remaining number display unit 35 is 2, the first When the credit insertion switch 77 is pushed, the numerical value of the remaining number display section 35 is all decremented to 0, and the virtual medals that can be inserted are betted.

An upper lamp unit 13 is arranged above the front door 12 . The upper ramp unit 13 includes therein an upper ramp 13a formed in a laterally long shape along the upper side (upper base member 27) of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. The upper lamp 13a has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting devices) capable of emitting light, and the LEDs can be lit or blinked as the game progresses.

In this embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 15 is composed of a liquid crystal display with the intention of diversification of display contents and enhancement of display effect, but other display such as a dot matrix display is used. may The auxiliary display section 15 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 15 . An upper lamp 13 a , a speaker 14 , and a display control device 111 for driving the auxiliary display section 15 are provided on the rear surface of the auxiliary display section 15 . The shape, position, number, etc. of the lamps 13 and the speakers 14 are not particularly limited to those described above.

Above the medal receiving tray 18, as shown in FIG. 2, a lower plate 16 is mounted on which the model name, characters related to the game, etc. are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6, a power box 121 is provided on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the hopper device 91 inside the housing 11 . The power box 121 includes a power switch 122, a reset switch 123, a setting key insertion hole 124, and the like. The power switch 122 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 131 .

The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10 . The slot machine 10 has a function of backing up various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure upon recovery from the power failure (recovery of power). It is possible. Therefore, if the power is cut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held, but when the power switch 122 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 123, the backup data is reset. It has become so. Further, when the reset switch 123 is pressed while the power switch 122 is on, the error state is reset.

The setting key insertion hole 124 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the number of medals to be output. That is, the setting state (winning probability setting process) of the slot machine 10 can be changed from "setting 1" to "setting 6" by inserting and operating the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 by the hall manager or the like. It has become.

Above the reel unit 41, the main controller 131 is attached to the back plate 11c of the housing 11, as shown in FIG. The main control unit 131 includes a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores game programs, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, time counting and synchronization. It is provided with a main board including a clock circuit and the like used for planning, etc., and the main board is housed in a board box as encapsulation means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit as sealing means, thereby sealing the substrate box. Note that the box base and the box cover may be configured to be unopenably connected using a key member.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the selector 83. As shown in FIG. Note that the two-dot chain line in the drawing indicates the passing route of medals for easy understanding. The selector 83 is formed with a guide passage 85 for guiding medals inserted from the medal slot 75 to the storage passage 81 . The guide passage 85 is formed in a curved shape that draws an arc from the upper end portion to the lower right portion of the figure so that medals can pass in a single row. More specifically, a selector body that constitutes the selector 83 is provided with a ridge 85a projecting toward the front side of the drawing, and a guide passage 85 is formed along the ridge 85a. As a result, the medals that have reached the guide passage 85 roll on the ridge 85a and flow downstream.

The medal passage switching member 84 has a passage switching piece 84a which is provided upstream of the guide passage 85 and can be retracted into and out of the guide passage 85, and a solenoid (not shown) for operating the passage switching piece 84a. are doing. When the solenoid is not energized, the passage switching piece 84a protrudes into the guide passage 85, and the flow of medals to the storage passage 81 is blocked. As a result, the medal falls downward over the ridge 85a and is guided to the passage 82 for ejection. Further, the passage switching piece 84a is retracted outside the guide passage 85 when the solenoid is energized. As a result, the tokens flow along the guiding passage 85 and are guided to the storing passage 81.例文帳に追加

A first inserted medal detection sensor 86 for detecting the passage of medals and a second inserted medal detection sensor 87 are arranged adjacently upstream and downstream of the guide passage 85 on the downstream side of the passage switching piece 84a. (The proximity state is such that the same token is detected at the same time at least once). When the solenoid of the medal passage switching member 84 is not energized, the medals fall downward from the middle of the guide passage 85, so that the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87 do not detect the passing of the medals. On the other hand, when the solenoid of the medal passage switching member 84 is energized, the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87 sequentially detect the passage of medals.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 131 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 151 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 151 is connected to a power supply unit 161 provided inside the power supply box 121, a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 131 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 131 are a start detection sensor 71a that detects the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, and 74a that individually detect the operation of the stop switches 72, 73, and 74, and a medal slot. A first inserted medal detection sensor 86 and a second inserted medal detection sensor 87 for detecting medals inserted from 75 (hereinafter these sensors are collectively referred to as inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87), each credit Credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, 79a for individually detecting the operation of the insertion switches 77, 78, 79; a switching detection sensor 80a for detecting the operation of the changeover switch 80; A reel index sensor 55 for detection, a payout detection sensor 91a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 91, a reset detection sensor 123a for detecting operation of the reset switch 123, and a setting key insertion hole 124 for detecting insertion of the setting key. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 124 a are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 151 via an input/output port 155 .

Detection signals from the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87 are also input to a detection signal latch circuit 88 . The detection signal latch circuit 88 has a signal detection circuit section for inputting the detection signal from the first inserted medal detection sensor 86 and the detection signal from the second inserted medal detection sensor 87, and the output signal of the signal detection circuit section. and a latch circuit unit for latching. The signal detection circuit section mainly includes an OR circuit, and when at least one of the detection signal from the first inserted medal detection sensor 86 and the detection signal from the second inserted medal detection sensor 87 is input, A signal corresponding to the OR of them is output to the latch circuit section, and a latch signal is output to the main controller 131 from the latch circuit section. The latch signal output state of the detection signal latch circuit 88 is held until a signal release command is input from the main controller 131 . Details will be described later.

Also, the input side of the main controller 131 is connected via the input/output port 155 to a power failure monitoring circuit 161 b provided in the power supply device 161 . The power supply unit 161 includes a power supply unit 161a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control unit 131, and the aforementioned power outage monitoring circuit 161b.

The power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 122 shuts off the power as well as the power failure. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 161a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 151 and the input/output port 155, and the CPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later.

Even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts, the power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 131. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 131 to execute the power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 131, each of the effective line display units 32, 33, 34, the remaining number display unit 35, the number of games display unit 36, the winning number display unit 37, and the reels 42L, 42M, 42R for rotating. stepping motors 61 (61L, 61M, 61R), a medal path switching member 84 provided in the selector 83, a hopper device 91, a display control device 111, an external centralized terminal board 171 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. etc. are connected via the input/output port 155 .

The display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13a, the failure lamp 13b, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display section 15, which constitute the lamp 13. The CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these are included in the display control device 111. It has an integrated substrate. After receiving a signal from the main controller 131 , the display controller 111 independently drives and controls the lamps 13 a and 13 b , the speaker 14 and the auxiliary display section 15 . Therefore, the display control device 111 serves as a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 131 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games. Note that the display control device 111 may control the various display units 32 to 37 .

The above-described CPU 151 includes a ROM 152 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 151, and an operation for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 152. In addition to the RAM 153 for securing an area, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, are not shown. Various counters such as The ROM 152 and RAM 153 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing the processes shown in various flowcharts shown in FIG.

The RAM 153 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 even after the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off. In addition to memories and areas for temporarily storing various data, a backup area is provided.

The backup area stores the values of the stack pointer, each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown due to operation of the power switch 122; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , and when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 122; the same shall apply hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 will be restored based on the information in the backup area before the power shutdown. state can be restored. Writing to the backup area is performed by power failure processing (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 10) when power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 151 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 161b when power is shut off due to power failure. NMI interrupt processing as flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, the displacement unit 300 arranged on the front door 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 37. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the overall configuration of the front door 12 in which the displacement unit 300 is arranged will be described. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the front door 12, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front door 12. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the upper part of the front door 12 is located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the top plate 11a of the housing 11 described above, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). An upper base member 27 provided, and a pair of left and right base members 28 and a right base member 29 extending downward from both ends in the extending direction of the upper base member 27, The upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29 form a gate shape when viewed from the front.

In addition, the front door 12 has a game panel 30 disposed on the front side of the inner region formed in the gate shape by the upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29. An upper lamp unit 13 , a left lamp unit 38 and a right lamp unit 39 are arranged at positions surrounding the game panel 30 .

The upper lamp unit 13 is arranged on the front side of the upper base member 27, the left lamp unit 38 is arranged on the front side of the left base member 28, and the right lamp unit 39 is arranged on the front side of the right base member 29, respectively. be done.

The game panel 30 includes an upper base member 27, a left base member 28, and a right base member 29 which are formed in a gate shape, and an upper lamp unit 13 and a left lamp which are arranged in front of them. It is interposed between the unit 38 and the right lamp unit 39 . Thereby, the game panel 30 is attached to the front door 12 .

The upper lamp unit 13 has an upper lamp 13a, the left lamp unit 38 has a left lamp 38a, and the right lamp unit 39 has a right lamp 39a. The emitted light can cause the surroundings of the slot machine 10 to emit light. The lamps 13a, 38a, 39a can individually emit different colors.

Further, the right lamp unit 39 has a displacement unit 300, which will be described later, disposed on the front side thereof, and the light emitted from the right lamp 39a passes through the displacement unit 300 to reach the front side of the displacement unit 300 (game light). (user side). That is, the displacement unit 300 can be illuminated by the right lamp 39a.

On the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29, which are formed in a gate shape, there is an upper (see FIG. 3) reel unit 41 (see FIG. 3). A liquid crystal frame member 600 arranged in the direction of arrow U), and an auxiliary display section 15 arranged on the rear side of the liquid crystal frame member 600 .

The liquid crystal frame member 600 is a member for making it easier for the player to see the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 15 , and is formed in a frame shape surrounding the image display surface of the auxiliary display section 15 . The liquid crystal frame member 600 is fastened and fixed to the upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29 described above, and the front door is opened with the front side in contact with the back side of the game panel 30. 12. That is, formation of a gap between the game panel 30 and the liquid crystal frame member 600 is suppressed. As a result, the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is reflected at the part where the gap is formed between the game panel 30 and the liquid crystal frame member 600 (the back surface of the game panel 30 and the front surface of the liquid crystal frame member 600). , the reflected light (image) can be suppressed from being viewed by the player. As a result, the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 15 can be easily recognized by the player.

The entire liquid crystal frame member 600 is formed in black. This makes it easier for the liquid crystal frame member 600 to absorb the light emitted from the outside of the slot machine 10 to the liquid crystal frame member 600 than when the liquid crystal frame member 600 is formed in white. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light that is irradiated from the outside of the slot machine 10 onto the liquid crystal frame member 600 from being reflected by the liquid crystal frame member 600 and the reflected light from entering the auxiliary display section 15 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 15 from becoming difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In addition, as described above, the liquid crystal frame member 600 is formed in a front view frame shape surrounding the periphery of the image display surface of the auxiliary display section 15, and is disposed above the reel unit 41 (see FIG. 3). The image display surface of the auxiliary display section 15 viewed through the game panel 30 and the reels 42L, 42M and 42R of the reel unit 41 can be vertically divided into two regions.

Next, the overall configuration of the displacement unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13(a) is a front view of the displacement unit 300, FIG. 13(b) is a side view of the displacement unit 300 in the XIIIb direction of FIG. 13(a), and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the displacement unit 300 taken along line XIIIc-XIIIc of (a); 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement unit 300. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective rear view of the displacement unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the displacement unit 300 includes a base unit 390 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the right lamp unit 39 (see FIG. 11), and a base unit 390. Intermediate member 380 arranged with coil spring SP1 interposed on the front side of, operation unit 320 arranged on the front side of intermediate member 380, part of operation unit 320 (rotation unit 340) and an annular member 310 that accommodates the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390 inside. and are mainly provided.

The annular member 310 includes an annular portion 311 formed in a hollow annular (cylindrical) shape penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and an annular portion extending from the inner peripheral surface of the front end of the annular portion 311. and a regulation wall 312 erected toward the inner side of 311 .

The annular portion 311 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a guide unit 350 and a base unit 390 to be described later. In addition, the annular portion 311 is formed with a plurality of fastening holes for fastening screws inserted through the guide unit 350 and the base unit 390 from the rear side. Thereby, the guide unit 350 and the base unit 390 can be fastened and fixed to the annular member 310 .

Note that the annular portion 311 has an inner edge (inner peripheral surface) penetrating in the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrow FB) that is inclined upward from the back side toward the front side (FIG. 13(c)). reference). Accordingly, the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390 arranged inside the annular portion 311 are similarly inclined upward toward the front side. However, in the following description, the stacking direction of the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390 is assumed to be the front-back direction for easy understanding.

The regulation wall 312 is formed in a disc shape, has an opening 312a, and has an outer peripheral portion connected to an inner peripheral surface of the annular portion 311 . The opening 312a is formed in the shape of a perfect circle, and its opening width (inner diameter) is set smaller than the outer diameter of the guide unit 350, which will be described later. As a result, when the guide unit 350 is arranged on the annular member 310 , the guide unit 350 is inserted into the annular member 310 from the back side of the annular member 310 , and the front side of the guide unit 350 is placed on the regulation wall 312 . can be brought into contact with the back side of the

The operation unit 320 includes a gripping unit 330 arranged on the front side, and a rotating unit 340 connected to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330 .

The grasping unit 330 is elongated in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from the side. Also, the gripping unit 330 is a portion to be gripped by the player, and the end on the front side (arrow F direction side) is located on the front side (the side of the ring member 310) through the opening 312a of the ring member 310 described above. (Player side), and the player can hold (operate) the end on the front side.

The manner in which the player operates the grasping unit 330 is not limited to the manner in which the grasping unit 330 is grasped. It may be a mode to pull out to.

The rotating unit 340 is formed in a substantially columnar shape having an axis extending (parallel to) in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB). direction side) are connected. As a result, the rotating unit 340 can be displaced in conjunction with the grasping (operating) and displacing of the grasping unit 330 by the player.

The rotation unit 340 is housed inside a guide unit 350 to be described later, and its displacement is regulated (guided) by a guide groove 351 formed inside the guide unit 350 . Therefore, the grasping unit 330 interlocked with the rotating unit 340 is regulated (guided) by the guide groove 351 formed in the guide unit 350 . A detailed description of the guide groove 351 will be given later.

The guide unit 350 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rotation unit 340, and is provided on the front side guide unit 360 for restricting the displacement of the rotation unit 340 to the front side, and on the back side of the rotation unit 340 ( and a rear-side guide unit 370 disposed on the arrow B direction side) for restricting the displacement of the rotation unit 340 to the rear side.

The front-side guide unit 360 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape having an axis extending (parallel to) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the rotation unit 340 . Further, the front-side guide unit 360 has an outer dimension in the front-rear direction set larger than the outer dimension of the rotation unit 340 , so that the rotation unit 340 can be accommodated inside the front-side guide unit 360 .

The rear-side guide unit 370 includes a first portion 371 formed in a substantially annular shape having an axis extending (parallel to) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). formed smaller than the outer diameter of the Therefore, the rotation unit 340 is accommodated inside the guide unit 350 by fastening the front-side guide unit 360 and the back-side guide unit 370 after accommodating the rotation unit 340 inside the front-side guide unit 360 . A detailed description of the configuration of the back side guide unit 370 and the displacement of the rotation unit 340 will be given later.

The intermediate member 380 is a member that transmits the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 to the rotating unit 340, and is arranged at a position adjacent to the back side of the rotating unit 340 (arrow B direction side). Further, the intermediate member 380 is formed in a disc shape, and its outer diameter is set smaller than the inner diameter of the back side guide unit 370 of the guide unit 350 . Thereby, the intermediate member 380 can be displaced inside the guide unit 350 .

The intermediate member 380 has a circular first opening 381 at the center of the disk shape, and a front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a position away from the center of the first opening 381 in the radial direction. a second opening 382, a third opening 383 opening in the front-rear direction at a position different in the circumferential direction from the second opening 382, and a projecting portion projecting radially outward from a part of the outer peripheral portion. 384;

The first opening 381 is an opening for aligning (positioning) the intermediate member 380 with respect to the rotation unit 340 . The intermediate member 380 is positioned with respect to the rotation unit 340 by inserting an insertion portion 342 a protruding from the back side of the rotation unit 340 described later into the first opening 381 .

The intermediate member 380 also includes a cylindrical standing portion 385 that stands from the back side (arrow B direction side) along the inner edge of the first opening portion 381 . The upright portion 385 is a portion to which the front side (arrow F direction side) of the coil spring SP1 is fitted, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the coil spring SP1. Therefore, since the coil spring SP1 is fitted onto the standing portion 385, it is possible to prevent the position of the coil spring SP1 from shifting with respect to the intermediate member 380 due to elastic deformation of the coil spring SP1.

The second opening portion 382 is an elongated opening curved along an arc centered on the axis of the intermediate member 380 (that is, an annular shape concentric with the axis of the intermediate member 380 divided in the circumferential direction). opening). The second opening 382 is an opening through which an engagement piece 342b of the rotation unit 340, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a size (area) that does not interfere with the displacement trajectory of the engagement piece 342b.

The third opening 383 is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) extending from the right lamp unit 39 through the base unit 390 and extending into the inside of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) is inserted. Further, the intermediate member 380 includes a wall portion 386 erected from the rear side (arrow B direction side) along the inner edge of the third opening portion 383 . The wall portion 386 is formed as a continuous wall portion along the inner edge of the third opening portion 383 .

Thereby, the wiring extended from the base unit 390 can be connected to the inside of the rotation unit 340 (the operation unit 320) via (inserted through) the third opening 383 . Furthermore, when the intermediate member 380 is displaced, the wiring connected to the inside of the rotating unit 340 is prevented from being caught between the intermediate member 380 and the base unit 390 by the wall portion 386, thereby preventing the wiring from breaking. can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 384 is a projection that is inserted into the inside of a recessed cutout portion 371a of the guide unit 350, which will be described later, and engages with the guide unit 350. The external shape of the projecting portion 384 is the inner surface shape of the recessed cutout portion 371a. is formed into a shape corresponding to the Therefore, in a state in which the projecting portion 384 is inserted inside the recessed portion 371a, even if an external force is input to the intermediate member 380 to rotationally displace the intermediate member 380 with respect to the guide unit 350 about the axis, the projecting portion 384 does not move. The rotation of the intermediate member 380 with respect to the guide unit 350 is suppressed (restricted) by the contact of the portion 384 with the inner surface of the recessed portion 371a.

The base unit 390 covers the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310, and the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, and the intermediate member 380, which are housed inside the annular member 310, come out to the back side. The ring member 310 has substantially the same inner edge shape and outer edge shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened and fixed inside the rear side of the ring member 310 .

In addition, the base unit 390 has a plurality of fastening holes 392a3 on the back side, into which tips of screws inserted from the back side are screwed into the insertion holes of the right base member 29 described above. Therefore, by screwing a screw inserted from the rear side of the right base member 29 (see FIG. 11) into the fastening hole 392a3, the displacement unit 300 integrated with a plurality of constituent elements is disposed on the front door 12. be done. Therefore, since the head of the screw that fastens the displacement unit 300 to the front door 12 can be positioned on the back side of the right base member 29, it is possible to prevent the displacement unit 300 from being illegally removed from the player side.

Next, the grasping unit 330 and the rotating unit 340 of the operation unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. FIG. 16(a) is a front view of the operation unit 320, FIG. 16(b) is a side view of the operation unit 320 as viewed in the XVIb direction of FIG. 16(a), and FIG. 4 is a rear view of unit 320. FIG. 17A is a perspective front view of the operation unit 320, and FIG. 17B is a perspective rear view of the operation unit 320. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 320, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the grasping unit 330. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, the gripping unit 330 includes a right cover member 331 arranged on the right side in front view, a left cover member 332 arranged on the left side in front view, these right cover members 331, and , and a vibrating device 333 disposed between the left cover members 332 .

The right cover member 331 includes a circular plate-shaped circular portion 331a positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gripping unit 330 elongated in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and a circular portion 331a. A projecting portion 331b projecting radially outward (arrow B direction side) from the outer edge of the portion 331a and located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the grip unit 330, and an inner surface of the circular portion 331a. An annular right first wall portion 331c protruding (standing) from (a surface facing the left cover member 332) toward the left cover member 332 (arrow L direction), and the front and rear of the protruding portion 331b. A right second wall portion 331d protruding (standing) toward the left cover member 332 from an outer edge extending in a direction (arrow FB direction), and a right side first wall portion 331c (the center of the circular shape). a third right wall portion 331e protruding (standing) from the inner surface of the circular portion 331a in an annular shape substantially concentric with the first right wall portion 331c; and a protruding portion 331f protruding from the rear surface side.

The left cover member 332 is formed in substantially the same shape as the right cover member 331 by reversing it in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) (substantially symmetrical with respect to the mating surface with the right cover member 331). be done. Therefore, like the right cover member 331, the left cover member 332 has a circular plate-like circular portion 332a positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gripping unit 330 that is elongated in the front-rear direction. , a projecting portion 332b projecting radially outward (arrow B direction side) from the outer edge of the circular portion 332a and located on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the grip unit 330; A first left wall portion 332c protruding from the inner surface of 332a (the surface facing the right cover member 331) toward the right cover member 331 (direction of arrow R), −B direction) and positioned inside (center side of the circle) of the left second wall portion 332d projecting (standing) toward the right cover member 331 side and the left first wall portion 332c. A third left wall portion 332e protrudes (stands) in an annular shape substantially concentrically with the first right wall portion 331c from the inner surface of the circular portion 332a, and a rear side end portion of the protruding portion 332b extends to the rear side. and a protruding portion 332f that protrudes toward.

Therefore, in the following description, the right cover member 331 will be described as a representative example, and description of the left cover member 332 will be omitted. Note that the difference between the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 will be described later.

The circular part 331a is the right side surface when the player grips the gripping unit 330. The central part of the circular shape is formed flat, and the annular part outside (outer edge side) of the central part is the left side cover. It is formed to be inclined toward the member 332 side. As a result, the thickness of the grasping unit 330, which is the portion grasped by the player, is increased at the central portion, so that the grasping unit 330 can be easily grasped by the player. That is, since the outer annular portion of the circular portion 331a is inclined, the thickness of the outer portion of the grasping unit 330 can be reduced. As a result, when the player grips the gripping unit 330 , it is possible to prevent the player's hand from being caught on the end of the circular portion 331 a , thereby making it easier for the player to rotate the gripping unit 330 .

The projecting portion 331b is a portion that secures an amount of displacement of the circular portion 331a of the grip unit 330 to the back side when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the back side, and the dimension in the vertical direction is the same as that of the guide unit 350 described later. is set smaller than the inner diameter of the reduced diameter portion 361b. As a result, the protruding portion 331b can be inserted inside the guide unit 350 by inserting the diameter-reduced portion 361b. Further, when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the rear side by the length of the protruding portion 331b protruding from the reduced diameter portion 361b toward the front side (direction of the arrow F), the circular portion 331a moves toward the guide unit 350. Contact can be suppressed.

The right first wall portion 331c and the right second wall portion 331d of the right cover member 331 are erected toward the left cover member 322 side, and the left first wall portion 332c of the left cover member 332 and the left second wall portion The two wall portions 332d are erected toward the right cover member 321 side, and when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined, the erected distal end surfaces of the respective wall portions are in contact with each other. Therefore, a gap (space) is formed between the circular portion 331a, the protruding portion 331b, and the circular portion 332a, and the protruding portion 332b, and the vibration device 333 is arranged in the gap.

The right first wall portion 331c includes an engaging portion 331c1 and a positioning projection 331c2. The engaging portion 331c1 is located on the front side of the right first wall portion 331c (the arrow F direction side, the side opposite to the projecting portion 331b), and is located on the standing tip side of the right first wall portion 331c (the arrow L direction side). projecting radially inward (arrow B direction side, projecting portion 331b side) from the inner peripheral surface of the . The positioning protrusion 331c2 is connected to the inner peripheral surface of the right first wall portion 331c and protrudes toward the left cover member 332 from the standing end of the right first wall portion 331c.

On the other hand, the left first wall portion 332c includes an engaged portion 332c1 and a positioning projection 332c2. The engaged portion 332c1 is located on the front side of the left first wall portion 332c (the arrow F direction side, the side opposite to the projecting portion 332b), and is located on the standing tip side of the left first wall portion 332c (the arrow R direction side). ) radially inward (arrow B direction side, projecting portion 332b side). The engaged portion 332c1 has a first portion protruding radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall portion 332c, and protrudes toward the right cover member 331 from the protruding tip of the first portion. A second portion and a third portion extending from the projecting tip of the second portion to the front side (direction of arrow F) and extending substantially parallel to the first portion are formed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. It is formed. The positioning protrusion 332c2 is connected to the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall portion 332c and protrudes toward the right cover member 331 from the standing tip of the left first wall portion 332c.

The engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 are arranged at corresponding positions (same phase). It can be combined with the cover member 332 . Specifically, when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined and fastened, the engaging portion 331c1 is inserted (arranged) between the opposed first and second portions of the engaged portion 332c1. As a result, the front side (player side) of the mating surfaces of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 is engaged, and the opening of such mating surfaces can be suppressed.

Further, when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined, the positioning projection 331c2 of the right cover member 331 is inscribed in the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall portion 332c of the left cover member 332, and the left cover member 332 The positioning protrusion 332 c 2 is inscribed in the inner peripheral surface of the right first wall portion 331 c of the right cover member 331 . Thereby, the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 can be radially positioned.

The positioning protrusion 331c2 and the positioning protrusion 332c2 are formed at different positions (different phases) in the circumferential direction of the first wall portions 331c and 332c. and the positioning protrusion 332c2 is suppressed.

The right third wall portion 331 e is a wall portion (protrusion) that accommodates the vibrating device 333 inside, and is formed in an annular shape along the outer shape of the vibrating device 333 . As a result, when electric power is applied to the vibrating device 333 and the vibrating device 333 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the outside of the gripping unit 330 (the gripping unit 330 is It can be transmitted to the hand of the player who operates it. Thus, by vibrating the vibrating device 333, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the displacement unit 300, or that the game state is advantageous to the player.

The projecting portion 331f is a portion that is fastened to the rotating unit 340, and fastening holes (not shown) into which screws inserted from the rotating unit 340 side (rear side) are screwed are formed at a plurality of locations on the tip of the projecting portion 331f. be done. Further, the protruding portion 331f is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the concave shape of the concave portion 341a1, which will be described later. Therefore, the grasping unit 330 is fastened to the rotating unit 340 with the projecting portion 331f accommodated in the recessed portion 341a1 of the rotating unit 340 .

A through hole 331f1 is formed in the projecting portion 331f of the right cover member 331 so as to penetrate in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). On the other hand, the projecting portion 332f of the left cover member 332 is formed with a fastening hole 332f1 into which a screw is screwed. The through hole 331f1 and the fastening hole 332f1 are coaxially formed in the horizontal direction, and the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are fastened together by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 331f1 into the fastening hole 332f1. be done.

That is, the rear side of the right cover member 331 is fastened to the rear side of the left cover member 332 (arrow B direction side) by screwing the through hole 331f1 and the fastening hole 332f1. As described above, the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 (grip unit 330) are engaged by the engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 on the front side. Therefore, the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are removed by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 331f1 into the fastening hole 332f1 while the engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 are engaged. Impossible.

In this case, when the gripping unit 330 is connected to the rotating unit 340 , the screws (protrusions 331 f and 332 f ) that fasten the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are housed in the recessed portion 341 a 1 of the rotating unit 340 . Therefore, when the displacement unit 300 is assembled, the grasping unit 330 can be made difficult to be disassembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the grasping unit 330 from being illegally disassembled by the player.

The rotating unit 340 includes a front side member 341 connected to the gripping unit 330, a cylindrical shaft member 343 projecting radially outward from the rear side member 342, and surrounding the shaft member 343. and an annular guided member 344 arranged in a (rotatably fitted) state.

The front-side member 341 includes a connecting portion 341a that is located on the grip unit 330 side (front side) and formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and along the outer edge of the connecting portion 341a toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). and a cylindrical standing wall 341b that is erected.

The connecting portion 341a includes a recessed portion 341a1 that is recessed toward the inside (rear side) of the standing wall 341b, and an opening 341a2 that is formed through the inner portion recessed by the recessed portion 341a1. Prepare.

The recessed portion 341a1 is a portion to which the gripping unit 330 described above is connected, and a plurality of insertion holes (not shown) are formed in the bottom surface of the recessed portion. The insertion holes of the recessed portion 341a1 are opened at positions facing respective fastening holes (not shown) formed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) of the projecting portions 331f and 332f of the grip unit 330 . Therefore, the grasping unit 330 and the rotating unit 340 (the front side member 341) are fastened by fastening the screw inserted through the insertion hole of the concave portion 341a1 to the fastening hole formed in the projecting portions 331f and 332f. .

The opening 341a2 is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the vibration device 333 of the gripping unit 330 described above is inserted from the rotating unit 340 side to the gripping unit 330 side. It communicates with the space between the opposing installation portions 332b. Therefore, the wiring inserted through the opening 341 a 2 is inserted inside the grasping unit 330 from the space between the projecting portions 331 b and 332 b facing each other, and is connected to the vibrating device 333 .

The standing wall 341b is a portion that regulates the posture of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) with respect to the guide unit 350, which will be described later. formed in The outer diameter of the erected wall 341b is a virtual circle (virtual line KS1 (see FIG. 21A)) circumscribing each of a plurality of projecting portions 362a1 of the second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350, which will be described later. is set to a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of As a result, when the rotating unit 340 is accommodated inside the guide unit 350, the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 341b is positioned at the tip (outer peripheral surface) of the plurality of projecting portions 362a1 of the second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350. By abutting, the posture of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 is regulated.

The standing wall 341b also includes a restricting piece 341b1 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface. The restricting piece 341b1 is a portion that defines the rotation range (rotation amount) of the rotation unit 340 with respect to the guide unit 350, and is disposed inside a housing recess 362a5 of the second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350, which will be described later. When the rotation unit 340 is rotationally displaced relative to the guide unit 350, the restricting piece 341b1 abuts against one inner surface or the other inner surface of the housing recess 362a5, so that the guide unit of the rotation unit 340 is displaced. Rotation in one direction or the other with respect to 350 is restricted. Thereby, the rotation range (rotation amount) of the rotation unit 340 is defined.

The rear side member 342 is formed in a disc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the erected wall 341b, and is disposed on the erected wall 341b at a position where the central axis thereof is coaxial with the axis of the erected wall 341b. be done. In addition, the back side member 342 has a columnar insertion portion 342a that protrudes from the center (shaft portion) of the back side (the surface on the side opposite to the front side member 341) and is positioned radially outwardly away from the insertion portion 342a. It has an engaging piece 342b projecting from the back, an insertion opening 342c opening at a different position in the circumferential direction from the engaging piece 342b, and an annular standing portion 342d standing from the front.

The insertion portion 342a is a portion inserted into the first opening 381 of the intermediate member 380 as described above, and its outer diameter is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first opening 381 . Therefore, by inserting the insertion portion 342 a into the first opening 381 , the position of the intermediate member 380 is prevented from being displaced in the radial direction (perpendicular to the axis) with respect to the rotation unit 340 . That is, the rotating unit 340 and the intermediate member 380 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable while their relative positions in the radial direction are determined.

The engagement piece 342 b is a portion that engages with a first displacement member 396 of the base unit 390 to be described later and transmits the displacement of the rotation unit 340 to the displacement unit 395 . The length dimension of the engaging piece 342b is such that when the engaging piece 342b is inserted through the second opening 382 of the intermediate member 380 (see FIG. 15) (in the assembled state of the displacement unit 300), the tip of the inserted tip is the rear surface of the intermediate member 380. The dimension is set so as to protrude from the base unit 390 side.

Also, the engaging piece 342b is formed with a substantially T-shaped cross section from a first piece 342b1 and a second piece 342b2. The first piece 342b1 is formed in a cross-sectional shape extending in the circumferential direction around the center (axis) side of the front side member 341, and stands upright from the rear surface of the front side member 341 while maintaining the cross-sectional shape. The second piece 342b2 has a rectangular cross section and protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the first piece 342b1 toward the insertion portion 342a. That is, the second piece 342b2 extends along the longitudinal direction of the first piece 342b1. As a result, the rigidity of the engaging piece 342b is increased, and when the engaging piece 342b is engaged with the first displacement member 396, damage (breakage) of the engaging piece 342b can be suppressed.

The insertion opening 342c is an opening through which the wiring (not shown) that is inserted through the third opening 383 of the intermediate member 380 toward the rotation unit 340 is inserted inside the rotation unit 340, as described above. As a result, the wiring that is inserted from the right lamp unit 39 (see FIG. 11) to the base unit 390 and the rotation unit 340 via the intermediate member 380 is inserted through the opening 341a2 of the front side member 341 of the rotation unit 340. can be connected to the vibration device 333 of the gripping unit 330 .

The erected portion 342d is a cylindrical portion erected toward the front side member 341 (front side) from a position radially inside the outer edge of the back side member 342. The dimension is set smaller than the outer diameter of the side member 342 . The outer diameter of the standing portion 342d is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the standing wall 341b of the front side member 341, so that when the front side member 341 and the rear side member 342 are combined, the standing portion 342d is arranged (internally fitted) inside the erected wall 341b of the front side member 341 . Therefore, when the front side member 341 and the back side member 342 are combined, the rear side member 342 can be easily positioned with respect to the front side member 341 by inserting the standing portion 342d into the standing wall 341b. In addition, by inserting (internally fitting) the erected portion 342d into the erected wall 341b, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the rotation unit 340 by strengthening the connection between the two, and also to secure the rigidity of the front side member 341 and the rear side member 342. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the internal space from the mating surfaces.

The erected portion 342d includes a shaft support hole 342d1 penetrating in the radial direction (plate thickness direction (direction orthogonal to the axis of the back side member 342)). The shaft support hole 342d1 is a hole through which a shaft member 343, which will be described later, is inserted. A pair of the shaft support holes 342d1 are formed at positions facing each other across the axis of the back side member 342 (positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees).

The shaft member 343 has a columnar portion, an enlarged diameter portion 343a formed on one axial end side of the columnar portion so as to expand radially outward, and an axis of the columnar portion. and a groove portion 343b recessed in a groove shape on the other end side in the direction. The shaft member 343 is inserted into a guided member 344 and a shaft support hole 342d1, which will be described later, with the other end in the axial direction where the groove 343b is formed directed toward the center of the back side member 342. As shown in FIG.

The expanded diameter portion 343 a is a restricting portion that restricts the guided member 344 from slipping out toward one end in the axial direction.

The groove portion 343b is formed as a groove that continues along the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and an E-ring C having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the pivot hole 342d1 of the rear side member 342 is fitted in the groove (groove portion 343b). . This prevents the shaft member 343 from falling out of the shaft support hole 342d1.

The guided member 344 is a cylindrical (roller-shaped) member guided by a guide groove 351 (see FIG. 22(d)) of a guide unit 350, which will be described later. is inserted into the The inner diameter of the guided member 344 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the portion of the shaft member 343 excluding the enlarged diameter portion 343a (the portion formed in a columnar shape).

Thereby, the guided member 344 is rotatably held (supported) by the shaft member 343 . Therefore, when the guided member 344 is guided by the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350, the guided member 344 is rotated (rolled) with respect to the inner surface of the guide groove 351, thereby 340) can be displaced.

Next, the guide unit 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 20(a) is a front view of the guide unit 350, FIG. 20(b) is a perspective front view of the guide unit 350, and FIG. 20(c) is a perspective rear view of the guide unit 350, FIG. 20(d) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 350 along line XXd-XXd of FIG. 20(a). 21(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the guide unit 350, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded sectional view of the guide unit 350. FIG. 21 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 20(d).

As described above, the guide unit 350 includes the front guide unit 360 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) and the front side guide unit 360 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front side guide unit 360. and a back side guide unit 370 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the front side guide unit 360 is formed by axially combining two cylindrical members that are annular when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side). and a second annular member 362 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first annular member 361 .

The first annular member 361 has a cylindrical tubular portion 361a and a front side (arrow F direction) end portion of the tubular portion 361a that is reduced in diameter (protrudes radially inward in a flange shape). It includes a diameter-reduced portion 361b and an attachment portion 361c that partially bulges (overhangs) radially outward from the end portion of the cylindrical portion 361a on the back side (arrow B direction side). .

The cylindrical portion 361a has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the opening 312a of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 14). As a result, when the guide unit 350 is arranged in the annular member 310, the cylindrical portion 361a (the guide unit 350) is fitted into the opening 312a of the annular member 310, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 312a and the cylindrical portion 361a are fitted. Formation of a gap with the outer peripheral surface of the portion 361a can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inserting an illegal member (for example, wire, piano wire, etc.) into the displacement unit 300 from the front side of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

The reduced-diameter portion 361b has an inner diameter smaller than the diameter of the circular portions 331a and 332a (see FIG. 17) of the grip unit 330 described above. Therefore, for example, when the rotation unit 340 is damaged and the rotation unit 340 is displaced more than the prescribed displacement amount, the circular portions 331a and 332a of the grasping unit 330 are brought into contact with the inner edge of the diameter-reduced portion 361b. It is possible to prevent the entire grasping unit 330 (circular portions 331 a and 332 a ) from being pushed inside the guide unit 350 .

A screw hole (not shown) into which a screw for fastening the first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362 is screwed is formed on the back side of the attachment portion 361c.

The second annular member 362 includes a first cylindrical portion 362a formed in a cylindrical shape, a second cylindrical portion 362b located on the outer peripheral side of the first cylindrical portion 362a and surrounding the first cylindrical portion 362a, A connecting portion that connects the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a and the inner peripheral surface of the second cylindrical portion 362b.

The first cylindrical portion 362a has a plurality of protruding portions 362a1 that protrude from the inner peripheral surface, and is located on the back side (arrow B direction side) end of the first cylindrical portion 362a. A concave portion 362a2 and a housing concave portion 362a5 are provided.

As described above, the projecting portion 362a1 is a portion that abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the erected wall 341b of the rotating unit 340 and regulates the attitude (position) of the rotating unit 340 (operation unit 320) with respect to the guide unit 350. A plurality of (11 in this embodiment) are dispersedly arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the first cylindrical portion 362a. The plurality of projecting portions 362a1 are formed in a form in which virtual circles circumscribe tip surfaces (peripheral surfaces) of the plurality of projecting portions 362a1 when viewed from the front (as viewed in the axial direction of the second annular member 362). The diameter of the virtual circle (virtual line KS1) is set to be substantially equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 341b of the rotating unit 340. As shown in FIG.

As a result, when the rotating unit 340 (the operating unit 320) is displaced, the contact area between the standing wall 341b of the rotating unit 340 and the first cylindrical portion 362a of the guide unit 350 can be reduced. Therefore, resistance when displacing the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) can be reduced, and the rotation unit 340 can be easily displaced.

The concave portion 362a2 is a portion in which the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is arranged. A pair is formed at positions opposite to each other (positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees). In the assembled state of the displacement unit 300, the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 is accommodated in the recessed portion 362a2, and the guided member 344 is moved (rolled) along the inner wall of the recessed portion 362a2, thereby performing the operation. The operation direction (displacement direction) of the unit 320 is guided.

As described above, the accommodating recess 362a5 is a portion in which the restricting piece 341b1 of the rotating unit 340 is accommodated. The piece 341b1 is brought into contact to restrict the rotation of the rotating unit 340 within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the accommodation recess 362a5 is recessed in a range of about 45 degrees around the axis of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the rotatable range (angle) of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) is It is set at approximately 45 degrees.

The second cylindrical portion 362b has an end on the front side (arrow F direction side) connected to the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the portion connecting the second cylindrical portion 362b and the first cylindrical portion 362a has , through-holes (not shown) for inserting screws are formed. The first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362 are fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole into the attachment portion 361c of the first annular member 361 (front side guide unit 360 is assembled).

The back side guide unit 370 includes a first portion 371 formed in an annular shape, a second portion 372 protruding from the first portion 371 toward the front side, and a front side along the outer edge of the first portion 371. and a third portion 373 provided.

The first portion 371 has an outer diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and an inner diameter smaller than that of the standing wall 341b. Further, the first portion 371 is formed with a recessed portion 371a that is recessed radially outward from a portion of the inner edge.

The concave cutout portion 371a is a portion in which the projecting portion 384 of the intermediate member 380 is accommodated as described above. is regulated.

The second portion 372 is located along the inner edge of the first portion 371 and protrudes toward the second annular member 362 (front side). As shown in FIG. 20(d), the second portion 372 is a portion arranged in the recessed portion 362a2 of the second annular member 362 described above, and the protruding tip end surface thereof is the inner wall of the recessed portion 362a2 ( It abuts on the stepped surface connecting the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 20(d), the guide unit 350 in the assembled state includes a connecting surface of the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the rear side guide unit 370. A pair of guide grooves 351 that partially surround the concave portion 362a2 with the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 are formed at opposing positions across the center of the first cylindrical portion 362a.

The guide groove 351 is a groove that guides the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 described above, and the width of the groove is set larger than the outer diameter of the guided member 344 . A detailed description of the guide groove 351 will be given later.

The inner diameter of the third portion 373 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the first cylindrical portion 362a of the second annular member 362, and the rear surface of the second annular member 362 (front side guide unit 360) When the back side guide unit 370 is arranged on the side, it is fitted onto the first cylindrical portion 362a. This makes it possible to easily position the back side guide unit 370 in the front side guide unit 360 . Further, the rigidity of the guide unit 350 can be ensured by fitting the third portion 373 onto the first cylindrical portion 362a. In particular, the rigidity of the second annular member 362 can be ensured, and deformation of the guide groove 351 can be suppressed. Therefore, the guidance of the guided member 344 by the guide groove 351 can be stabilized, and the operability of the operation unit 320 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 22 to 24, a guide structure for displacing operation unit 320 with respect to guide unit 350 will be described.

FIGS. 22(a), 23(a) and 24(a) are perspective front views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 22(b), 23(b) and 24 ( b) is a front view of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 22(c), 23(c) and 24(c) are FIGS. 24(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 taken along line XXIIc-XXIIc, line XXIIIc-XXIIIc and line XXIVc-XXIV of FIG. 22(d), FIG. 23(d) and FIG. (d) is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 taken along lines XXIId-XXIId, XXIIId-XXIIId and XXIVd-XXIVd of FIGS. 22(a), 23(a) and 24(a). is.

In FIGS. 22(c), 23(c) and 24(c), only the outline of the operation unit 320 arranged in the guide unit 350 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines. 22 to 24 show transition states of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 in order. FIG. 22 shows a state in which the operation unit 320 is placed at the initial position without being operated by the player, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the operation unit 320 is located at a position between the initial position and the terminal position (hereinafter referred to as an "intermediate position"). is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the operation unit 320 is arranged at the initial position with respect to the guide unit 350, the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 of the grip unit 330 are horizontal. direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, the central flat surfaces of the circular portions 331a and 332a are perpendicular to the arrow LR direction), and the front side of the rotation unit 340 of the operation unit 320 is the first annular ring. It is arranged at a position abutting against the rear surface of the diameter-reduced portion 361b of the member 361 (see FIG. 23(c)).

As described above, in the operation unit 320, the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is arranged in the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350, and the guided member 344 is displaced (guided) along the guide groove 351. This defines the displacement of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 .

Here, the guide groove 351 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22(d), the guide groove 351 is formed by the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the rear side guide unit 370. It extends in the circumferential direction of the side guide unit 370 . A part of the guide groove 351 is formed to be inclined.

The guide groove 351 is formed by a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b formed by a second annular member 362 and a rear side guide unit 370 as inner walls that guide the movement (rolling) of the guided member 344. A third guide surface 351c and a fourth guide surface 351d are formed. In addition, the guide groove 351 has a first end portion 351e formed by the rear-side guide unit 370 and a second end portion 351e formed by the second annular member 362 as an inner wall that restricts the movement (rolling) of the guided member 344. and two ends 351f.

Here, in a game machine having a base member and a displacement member that is displaced along a groove formed in the base member, it is necessary to insert the projection formed in the displacement member into the groove of the base member. In this case, when the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted into the groove of the base member, if the other member is arranged at a position where it interferes with the displacement member, the displacement member can be attached to the base member while avoiding interference with the other member. Therefore, the shapes of the base member, displacement member, and other members are limited, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide groove 351 is formed by two members, the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370, so that the guided member 344 arranged inside the guide groove 351 (Operation unit 320) is arranged on the second annular member 362 (front side guide unit 360), then the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 are combined to assemble the operation unit 320 to the guide unit 350. be able to.

That is, by arranging the guided member 344 in the guide groove 351 on the side of the second annular member 362, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 320 from interfering with other members when the operation unit 320 is arranged on the second annular member 362. . As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the guide unit 350 and the operation unit 320 can be increased.

In particular, when the guide groove 351 is molded in the guide unit 350 formed in an annular shape, the structure of the mold becomes complicated. By forming the side guide unit 370 with two members, forming the guide groove 351 on the dividing surface, and setting the dividing direction of the two members to the drawing-out direction of the mold, the guide unit 350 can be formed in an annular shape. In addition, the structure of each mold can be simplified, and furthermore, it is possible to easily remove the mold after molding the guide groove 351 .

Although the guide groove 351 is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the guide unit 350 (the second annular member 362), the guide groove 351 is formed through the guide unit 350 in the radial direction. can be anything.

Further, when the operation unit 320 displaceable along the guide unit 350 is arranged inside the guide unit 350 formed in an annular shape, the guide groove 351 formed in the guide unit 350 is fitted with the guided member 344 . Since it is necessary to insert the operation unit 320 inside the guide unit 350 while inserting the After arranging the guide member 344 (operation unit 320) on the second annular member 362 (front side guide unit 360), the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 are combined to form the operation unit 320 into the guide unit. 350, the assembly work can be simplified.

The first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c are arranged facing each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. The facing distance between the first guide surface 351 a and the third guide surface 351 c is set larger than the diameter of the guided member 344 . As a result, the movement of the guided member 344 is guided by either the first guide surface 351a or the third guide surface 351c. In the following description, the area formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c in the guide groove 351 (the movement area of the guided member 344) is referred to as the "first guide area". will be described.

The first guide area (the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c) moves toward the back side (arrow B direction side) as it progresses from the initial position (separates from the first end portion 351e). It is formed as an inclined guideway extending in a direction. Therefore, by guiding the guided member 344 along the first guide region, the operation unit 320 rotates around the axes of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370, The member 362 and the rear guide unit 370 are displaced in the axial direction (arrow FB direction).

When no external force is applied to the operation unit 320 (the player does not operate), the rotation unit 340 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) by the coil spring SP1. Along with being urged, the base unit 390 (coil spring SP2), which will be described later, urges the base unit 390 in a counterclockwise direction (rotational direction for returning to the initial position) in a front view. Therefore, when the guided member 344 is in the first guiding region and the external force to the operation unit 320 is not input (for example, when the player releases the operation unit 320), the coil springs SP1 and SP2 , the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide surface 351a to the first end portion 351e and is returned to the initial position. At the initial position, the biasing forces of the coil springs SP1 and SP2 keep the guided member 344 in contact with the first end 351e.

The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are formed facing each other. The fourth guide surface 351d extends in a direction parallel to the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the second guide surface 351b is formed as a guide surface that inclines toward the front side as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. be.

The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side, that is, the first end portion 351e) of the first guide area (the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c). and the opposite side). As a result, when the guided member 344 is moved with the first guiding region toward the rear side (the arrow B direction side), the guided member 344 moves along the second guiding surface 351b and the fourth guiding surface 351d. Acceptable between facings.

The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are arranged facing each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. The minimum facing distance between the second guide surface 351 b and the fourth guide surface 351 d is set larger than the diameter of the guided member 344 . As a result, the movement of the guided member 344 is guided by either the second guide surface 351b or the fourth guide surface 351d. In the following description, the region formed between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d facing each other in the guide groove 351 (the movement region of the guided member 344) is referred to as the "second guide region". will be described.

The second guide surface 351b extends in the circumferential direction while approaching the front side (arrow F direction side) as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a (that is, as it separates from the second end 351f). The fourth guide surface 351d extends in the circumferential direction parallel to the virtual plane perpendicular to the axis of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370. It is formed as a guide surface that

Therefore, when the guided member 344 is guided along the second guide surface 351b of the second guide area, the operation unit 320 rotates about the axis of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370. while being displaced in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 .

The inclination angle of the second guide surface 351b is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the axial direction of the operation unit 320 per unit rotation is greater when the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide surface 351a than when the guided member 344 is guided along the second guide surface 351b. The amount of displacement is larger when guided.

On the other hand, when the guided member 344 is guided along the fourth guide surface 351d of the second guide area, the operation unit 320 moves the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 in the axial direction (arrow F −B direction), and only the second annular member 362 and the rear-side guide unit 370 are rotated about their axes.

Note that when the guided member 344 is positioned in the second guiding area and no external force is applied to the operation unit 320 (for example, the player releases the operation unit 320), the coil springs SP1 and SP2 The biasing force guides the guided member 344 along the second guide surface 351b toward the first guide area, and then returns to the initial position. In this case, since the second guide surface 351b is inclined in the second guide area, the return to the initial position can be performed smoothly.

The first end 351e is formed at the starting end of the first guide region (the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide region) and forms the initial position. That is, the operation unit 320 is positioned at the initial position by restricting the displacement of the guided member 344 by the first end portion 351e.

The second end 351f is formed at the terminal end of the second guide region (the end opposite to the connection side with the first guide region) to form the terminal position. That is, the displacement of the guided member 344 is restricted by the second end portion 351f, so that the operation unit 320 is positioned at the terminal position.

As shown in FIG. 23, the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise in front view by the operation of the player (for example, the circular portions 331a and 332a of the gripping unit 330 gripped by the player are rotated), or The operation unit 320 is operated by the player (for example, the player pushes the outer peripheral surface facing the player out of the mating surfaces (outer peripheral surfaces) of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 of the grip unit 330). is pushed forward (in the direction of arrow B) as viewed from the player, the guided member 344 of the operating unit 320 (rotating unit 340) is guided by the first guiding region of the guiding groove 351. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the guided member 344 is guided by the guide groove 351 (first guide area) in any operation (rotation or pushing), so that the operation unit 320 rotates in the circumferential direction and rotates on the rear surface. side (arrow B direction side).

That is, when the grasping unit 330 (circular portions 331a and 332a) is rotated clockwise in front view (when only the rotation operation is performed), it is brought into contact with the first guide surface 351a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. The (pressed) guided member 344 is guided (rolled) along the first guide surface 351a, and the operation unit 320 is rotated in the circumferential direction and displaced ( slide).

On the other hand, when the grasping unit 330 is pushed toward the rear side (direction of the arrow B) (when only the pushing operation is performed), the guided member 344 moves toward the third guide surface 351c against the urging force of the coil spring SP1. , and the guided member 344 is guided (rolled) along the third guide surface 351c, so that the operation unit 320 rotates in the circumferential direction and moves toward the rear side (arrow B direction side).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the direction in which the player operates the grip unit 330 (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the push operation) is different, the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) can be given a similar displacement. This allows the player to arbitrarily select the direction in which the operation unit 320 is operated. As a result, the interest of the player can be easily enhanced.

In addition, when a button or lever is pushed in one direction or tilted in one direction, the operation tends to be monotonous, and the operation tends to be monotonous. In contrast to the problem that it is difficult to make the operation interesting, in the present embodiment, the operation unit 320 slides or slides in a direction different from the direction of displacement caused by the pushing or rotating operation. Since the displacement can be formed, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be easily made interesting.

The direction in which the operation unit 320 is pushed toward the back side and the direction of the rotation axis during the rotation operation of the operation unit 320 are set parallel to each other. As a result, even when the direction in which the player operates the gripping unit 330 (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the pressing operation) is different, the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) can be displaced. It can be done easily.

When the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is further operated from the state shown in FIG. 23, the guided member 344 reaches the connecting portion between the first guide area and the second guide area. From this state, the gripping unit 330 (circular portions 331a and 332a) is rotated clockwise in a front view by a rotating operation (or an operation combining rotating and pushing), whereby the guided member 344 is moved to the second guiding position. guided to the area. After that, the guided member 344 is brought into contact with the second end portion 351f, so that the operation unit 320 (the gripping unit 330) is arranged at the end position as shown in FIG.

In this case, in the second guide area, when the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) is rotationally operated (that is, only a rotational force around the axis is applied), the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 causes the second guide surface to move. Guided member 344 abutted (pressed) against 351b is guided (rolled) along second guide surface 351b, so that operating unit 320 is rotated in the circumferential direction, Along with the inclination of the second guide surface 351b, it is also displaced (slid) to the rear side (arrow B direction side).

Further, when the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) is operated by an operation combining rotation and pushing, the guided member 344 abutted (pressed) against the fourth guide surface 351d by the pushing force of such operation. However, the operation unit 320 is only rotated in the circumferential direction by being guided (rolled) along the fourth guide surface 351d.

On the other hand, in the second guide area, the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) is not displaced only by the pressing operation. That is, in the second guide area, the fourth guide surface 351d is formed as a guide surface perpendicular to the axis of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 and parallel to the virtual plane. side (arrow B direction side), and even if the guided member 344 contacts (is pressed against) the fourth guide surface 351d against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, the guided member 344 remains in the fourth guiding direction. A force component for rolling along the surface 351d (that is, a force component in a direction to rotate the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330)) is not generated. Therefore, the guided member 344 stays at the connecting portion between the first guiding area and the second guiding area (or on the fourth guiding surface 351d), and the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) moves in the pushing direction (arrow B direction). and rotational directions.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing the second guide area, the direction in which the player operates the grip unit 330 (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the push operation). ) are different, the displacement mode of the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) can be changed (in this embodiment, the operation unit 320 is rotated for a rotation operation (or an operation combining rotation and pushing)). , the operation unit 320 is stopped only by the pressing operation). This allows the player to arbitrarily select the direction in which the operation unit 320 is operated. As a result, the interest of the player can be easily enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation unit 320 is pushed from the initial position to the back side, guided through the first guide area, and after reaching the second guide area, the operating direction is changed (that is, rotated). operation), the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) can be displaced to the terminal position. Therefore, the player can change the operation direction between the initial position and the terminal position (on the way). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of operating the operation unit 320 .

Further, when the operation unit 320 is pushed (slid) to the rear side, the guided member 344 is guided while coming into contact with the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d of the rear side guide unit 370 . On the other hand, when the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the guided member 344 is guided while contacting the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b of the second annular member 362 .

That is, the member with which the guided member 344 abuts can be changed in the operating direction of the operating unit 320 . Thereby, the contact surface with the guided member 344 can be set to have a shape and material suitable for the operation direction of the operation unit 320 .

For example, when the operation unit 320 is pressed, the guided member 344 contacts the fourth guide surface 351d when guided by the fourth guide surface 351d, and its displacement is restricted. The rear side guide unit 370 is made of a material that is resistant to shock, since the force of the force acts on the rear side guide unit 370 greatly. On the other hand, when the operation unit 320 is rotated, the guided member 344 is likely to slide and displace along the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b. set. As a result, concentrated deformation (deterioration) of only a part of the guide surface of the guide groove 351 can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the guide groove 351 can be improved.

Alternatively, the guide surface of the guide groove 351 may be formed in a stepped shape so that the vibration of sliding on the guide surface may be transmitted to the player operating the operation unit 320 . In this case, the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d and the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b are assumed to have different inner surface shapes, so that vibration when sliding on each guide surface is reduced. They may be set to have different frequencies when displaced at the same speed. Thereby, the operation feeling of operating the operation unit 320 can be made different for each guide surface.

Further, the guide surfaces on which the guided member 344 is guided when the operation unit 320 is pushed (slid) and when the operation unit 320 is rotated are the third guide surface 351c of the rear side guide unit 370 and It can be divided into a fourth guide surface 351 d and a first guide surface 351 a and a second guide surface 351 b of the second annular member 362 .

Accordingly, the guided member 344 can be guided along different guide surfaces according to the displacement mode of the operation unit 320, and the load applied to the guide surfaces can be dispersed. That is, if the displacement member that is displaced along the guide surface formed on the base member is always moved along a part of the guide surface, the load will be concentrated on a part of the guide surface and the guide surface will be displaced. However, in this embodiment, the guided member 344 can be guided along different guide surfaces according to the displacement mode of the operation unit 320, so that the load is not concentrated on some of the guide surfaces. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the back side guide unit 370 and the second annular member 362 in which the guide groove 351 is formed.

Furthermore, the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 of the guide groove 351 formed of two members and the rear side guide unit 370 is formed at a position different from the guide surface of the guided member 344 . To be precise, the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 consists of a connecting portion (connecting portion) between the first end portion 351e and the first guide surface 351a, a connecting portion between the second end portion 351f and the fourth and a connecting portion (connecting portion) of the guide surface 351d.

Here, when the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 is set on the guide surface of the guide groove 351, when the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 are combined, error (assembly tolerance) and processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370, there is a risk that a step may be formed on the guide surface of the guide groove 351. When the guided member 344 guided by 351 passes through the step, it may get caught on the step and be easily worn.

On the other hand, the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the rear-side guide unit 370 of the guide groove 351 formed by two members is formed at a position different from the guide surface of the guided member 344. Acceleration of wear of the guided member 344 guided by the 351 can be suppressed.

The connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the rear-side guide unit 370 may be set at a position where it does not come into contact when the guided member 344 is guided. Even if the connecting portion between the member 362 and the rear-side guide unit 370 is formed on the first guide surface 351a or the third guide surface 351c at a position spaced apart from the first end 351e by a value smaller than the radius of the guided member 344. It may be formed on the first end 351e and the second end 351f.

In addition, since the operation unit 320 can be guided along different guide surfaces during the rotating operation and during the pushing operation, and the guide surfaces are formed of different members, it is possible to change the design of the guide groove 351. Design changes can be made easily. For example, when changing the displacement mode of the operation unit 320 at the time of pushing, there is no need to change the shape of the second annular member 362, and the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d of the rear side guide unit 370 can be changed. only the shape of is changed.

The operation direction of the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) may be appropriately selected by the player, or the operation direction is transmitted to the player according to the contents of the effect of the slot machine 10 (the auxiliary display unit 15 (display or voice notification), and the player may be allowed to change the operation direction based on the notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, a guide mode (change in contact surface) of the guided member 344 by the guide groove 351 when the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) is displaced from the initial position to the terminal position. explain.

FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) and FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350. FIGS. (b) and FIG. 25(c) and FIGS. 26(a), 26(b) and 26(c) are respectively shown in FIGS. 22(c), 23(c) and 24(c). handle.

25(a) to 25(c) sequentially illustrate transition states of the guided member 344 when the player rotates the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330). In FIG. 26(c), the player pushes the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) toward the guide unit 450 (back side (arrow B direction)) and then rotates the operation unit 320 to be guided. The transition states of member 344 are illustrated in sequence.

25(a) and 26(a), the operation unit 320 is arranged at the initial position, and FIGS. 26(c) and 26(c) show the operation unit 320 at the end position. Each state is illustrated. 25(b) and 26(b), the guided member 344 is positioned at the starting end of the second guiding region (the end on the side of the first guiding region) (hereinafter referred to as "first position"). The arranged state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is rotationally operated by the player (when only rotational force around the axis is applied to the gripping unit 330) As described above, since the operation unit 320 (rotating unit 340) is urged forward (in the direction of arrow F) by the coil spring SP1, the guided member 344 is positioned at the first position of the guide groove 351. It comes into contact with the guide surface 351a and moves along the first guide surface 351a along the guide groove 351 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 25) to be guided in the first guide area.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), the guided member 344, which has passed through the first guide area and reached the first position in the second guide area, is positioned on the front surface of the second guide area (that is, the second guide area). It is arranged at a position where it abuts on the guide surface 351b).

As shown in FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c), the operating unit 320 is moved from the state where the guided member 344 is positioned at the first position of the second guiding area (in this case, the starting end of the second guiding surface 351b). When the (gripping unit 330) is further rotated by the player (only the rotational force around the axis is applied to the gripping unit 330), the guided member 344 moves to the operating unit 320 (rotating unit 340) as described above. ) is urged forward (in the direction of arrow F) by the coil spring SP1, it abuts against the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351, and the guide groove 351 is rotated along the second guide surface 351b. 25) to guide the second guide area to the end position (the position where it abuts on the second end 351f).

As described above, the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351 extends in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 25(c)) of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371, and the first guide surface It is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side as it goes to the connection side with 351a.

Therefore, when the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position to the end position by the rotation operation (that is, when only the rotational force around the axis is applied to the grip unit 330), the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351a Along with the inclination of the surface 351b, the operation unit 320 is rotated (displaced in the circumferential direction) and displaced to the rear side (arrow B direction side).

In this way, when the operation unit 320 is rotated from the initial position to the end position, the guided member 344 is guided by the first guide region and the second guide region that extend in different directions. The amount of slide displacement to the rear side with respect to the amount of rotation of the operation unit 320 is changed. That is, while the operation unit 320 is rotationally displaced, the displacement mode toward the rear side is changed. This makes the operation of the operation unit 320 interesting.

As shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), when the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) is pushed toward the rear side (only the pushing force in the axial direction is applied to the grasping unit 330). , or when an axial pushing force is applied to the grasping unit 330 and a rotating force is also applied around the axis), the guided member 344 abuts against the third guide portion 351c of the guide groove 351, 3 The guide groove 351 is moved in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 26) along the guide surface 351c to be guided in the first guide area.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the guided member 344, which has passed through the first guide area and reached the first position in the second guide area, is positioned on the back surface of the second guide area (that is, the fourth guide area). It is arranged at a position where it abuts on the guide surface 351d).

Here, when only the pushing force in the axial direction is applied to the operation unit 320 (the gripping unit 330), and the rotating force around the axis is not applied, the guided member 344 moves toward the first guide area (the third guide surface). 351c) and reaches the first position of the second guide area (in this case, the starting end of the fourth guide surface 351d), the guided member 344 reaches the fourth guide surface 351d (second guide area). Immediately after being guided, the displacement of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is stopped.

That is, as described above, the fourth guide surface 351d extends in the circumferential direction in a posture perpendicular to the axis of the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 and parallel to the virtual plane. Therefore, when the member to be guided 344 reaches the first position (starting end of the fourth guide surface 351d) of the second guiding area only by the pushing operation, the force acting on the member to be guided 344 and the extending direction of the fourth guide surface 351d are substantially perpendicular to each other, and no force component is generated in the rotational direction (circumferential direction, left-right direction in FIG. 26(b)). 330) cannot be displaced.

The third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d are arranged linearly in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 (horizontal direction in FIG. 25(b)). The intersection angle between the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d is set to a predetermined angle (preferably approximately 165 degrees or more and approximately 135 degrees or less, approximately 150 degrees in this embodiment).

As a result, when the guided member 344 is guided from the third guide surface 351c (first guide area) to the starting end (first position of the second guide area) of the fourth guide surface 351d, the impact is suppressed. However, it can be reliably guided to the first position. That is, if the tolerance angle is too large, the impact when the guided member 344 reaches the second guiding region becomes large, whereas if the tolerance angle is too small, the guided member 344 is displaced in the circumferential direction (rotational direction). Therefore, the guided member 344 cannot be smoothly transferred from the first guiding area to the second guiding area. On the other hand, by setting the tolerance angle as described above, the movement of the guided member 344 from the first guiding region to the second guiding region can be suppressed while suppressing the impact when the guided member 344 reaches the second guiding region. can be done smoothly.

As a result, when only the pushing force in the axial direction is applied to the operation unit 320 (the gripping unit 330), and the rotational force around the axis is not applied, the guided member 344 is held at the same position (first position) each time. Makes it easier to stop. As a result, since the player who operates the operation unit 320 can have the same feeling of operation (operation amount), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of the operation unit 320 .

As shown in FIGS. 26(b) and 26(c), the operation unit 320 is moved from the state where the guided member 344 is positioned at the first position of the second guide area (in this case, the starting end of the fourth guide surface 351d). When the (grasping unit 330) is further operated by the player (a pressing force in the axial direction is applied to the grasping unit 330 and a rotating force around the axis is also applied), the guided member 344 moves to the fourth position of the guide groove 351. The guide groove 351 (second guide region) is moved in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 26) along the fourth guide surface 351d, and the second guide region is moved to the end position (second end position). 351f).

When the player does not operate the operation unit 320 after pushing and sliding the operation unit 320 to operate the guided member 344 to a position where it contacts the second end 351f, the operation unit 320 The guided member 334 is guided to the starting position along the second guide surface 351b and the first guide surface 351a by the urging forces of the coil springs SP1 and SP2.

Therefore, when the operation unit 320 is pushed and slid, the guide surfaces (the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d) on which the guided member 344 is guided by these operations, the coil springs SP1, By differentiating the guide surfaces (second guide surface 351b, first guide surface 351a) on which the guided member 344 is guided by the biasing force of SP2, the load received by the contact of the guided member 344 can be effectively reduced. Distributable.

Note that the operation unit 320 (grasping unit 330) is rotated from the state where the guided member 344 is positioned at the first position (starting end of the fourth guide surface 351d) of the second guide area (that is, the gripping unit 330 rotates). When the guided member 344 is biased toward the front side (arrow F direction) by the coil spring SP1, the operation unit 320 (rotating unit 340) is biased by the coil spring SP1 as described above. Therefore, the guide groove 351 is brought into contact with the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351, and the guide groove 351 is moved in the circumferential direction along the second guide surface 351b. contact position) (see FIG. 25(c)).

Next, the base unit 390 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG. 27(a) is a front view of the base unit 390, FIG. 27(b) is a perspective front view of the base unit 390, and FIG. 27(c) is the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc of FIG. 27(a). is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 390 in FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective front view of the base unit 390. FIG. 29(a) is a front view of the base unit 391, and FIG. 29(b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 391 along line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29(a). 30(a) is a front view of the displacement unit 395, FIG. 30(b) is a rear view of the displacement unit 395, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 395;

27(a) to 27(c), the displacement unit 395 is biased by the coil spring SP2, and the displacement unit 395 contacts the second displacement member 397 with the restricting piece 392f of the base unit 391. A state of being placed in a position (hereinafter referred to as an “initial biased position”) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the base unit 390 includes a base unit 391, a displacement unit 395 disposed on the base unit 391, and a coil spring SP2 that biases the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. and are mainly provided.

The base unit 391 is formed in an outer shape (outer peripheral edge shape) corresponding to the inner peripheral edge shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300 described above. It mainly includes a base member 392 arranged (internally fitted), and a leaf spring 393 and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 392 .

The base member 392 includes a base plate 392a, a first wall portion 392b erected from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a, and formed in an arc shape (substantially C shape) when viewed from the front. A second wall portion 392c coaxial with the first wall portion 392b and having a larger diameter than the first wall portion 392b and having an arc shape (substantially C-shape) in a front view and erected from the front side of the base plate 392a; , a third wall portion 392h which is coaxial with the second wall portion 392c and has a larger diameter than the second wall portion 392c and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and erected from the front side of the base plate 392a; A spring engaging piece 392k, an inner first engaging piece 392d1, and an inner second engaging piece 392d2 protruding from the front side of the base plate 392a are formed inside the base plate 392a notched in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. and a regulating piece 392f.

The first wall portion 392b is a portion that accommodates (holds) the back side end portion of the coil spring SP1 that is arranged between the intermediate member 380 (see FIG. 14). It is set larger than the outer diameter of SP1 and formed (upright) at a position coaxial with the upright portion 385 (see FIG. 15) of the intermediate member 380 . In addition, the portion of the base plate 392a inside the first wall portion 392b (the portion surrounded by the first wall portion 392b) is set back to the rear side (arrow F direction side) from the other portion of the base plate 392a. . As a result, the depth dimension of the space surrounded by the first wall portion 392b can be ensured, so that the coil spring SP1 with a large free length can be adopted, and durability and operational feeling can be improved. Even a coil spring SP1 with a long free length can be stably accommodated (held).

The second wall portion 392c has a diameter larger than that of the first wall portion 392b, and is formed (upright) at a position spaced apart from the first wall portion 392b by a predetermined distance. The second wall portion 392 c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of a first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395 ), which will be described later, and extends along the displacement trajectory of the first displacement member 396 . That is, the inner diameter of the second wall portion 392 c is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the displacement locus of the first displacement member 396 . Although detailed description will be given later, the displacement unit 395 is arranged in a displaceable state between the opposing first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

The second wall portion 392c includes an outer first engaging piece 392e1 and an outer second engaging piece 392e2 protruding radially inward from the inner peripheral surface on the upright distal end side. The outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are positioned on the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 (positions overlapping the displacement trajectory when viewed from the front), and extend along the circumferential direction of the second wall portion 392c. are formed at positions spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

The outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are protrusions that restrict the displacement unit 395 attached (mounted) to the base unit 391 from falling off toward the front side (arrow F direction side). , and the base plate 391a is formed at a position that is equal to or slightly larger than the thickness of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Thereby, the displacement unit 395 arranged in front of the base plate 391a can be displaceably arranged between the base plate 391a and the outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 (FIG. 27). (c)).

The outer diameter of the third wall portion 392h is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the second cylindrical portion 362b (see FIG. 14) of the second annular member 362, and is coaxial with the second cylindrical portion 362b. formed at a position where As a result, in the assembled state of the displacement unit 300, the front side end portion (upright distal end surface) of the third wall portion 392h abuts against the rear side end portion of the second cylindrical portion 362b. As a result, unauthorized access to the interior of the displacement unit 300 from the outside can be suppressed.

The spring engagement piece 392k is a portion that engages one end of a coil spring SP2 that biases the displacement unit 395, which will be described later. It is formed in an L shape bent toward the side when viewed from the side.

The inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are members that guide the displacement of the displacement unit 395 described later and restrict its dropping (removal). The inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 are positioned radially inward of the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 when viewed from the front, and stand up from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. and a first portion (upright portion) provided, and a portion projecting radially inward from the projecting tip of the first portion, on the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 (overlapping the displacement trajectory in front view). position) and a second portion (protruding portion).

The first portion (upright portion) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 is disposed at a position facing the inner peripheral surface of the displacement unit 395, thereby The portion (upright portion) guides the displacement of the displacement unit 395 in the circumferential direction and restricts the radially inward displacement of the displacement unit 395 .

In addition, the outer peripheral surface (the surface facing the displacement unit 395) of the first portion (upright portion) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 is the first portion in a front view. It is formed as a circular peripheral surface that is concentric with the wall portion 392b. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement unit 395 in the circumferential direction can be smoothly guided.

The facing distance between the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 and the base plate 391a is the front-rear direction of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). The dimension is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the thickness in the direction of arrow FB. As a result, the displacement unit 395 arranged in front of the base plate 391a is moved between the base plate 391a and the second portions (protruding portions) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2. (see FIG. 27(c)).

The restricting piece 392f is a member that restricts the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to one side (prescribes the initial urging position), and is located between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c in a front view. , is formed at a position overlapping the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 when viewed from the front.

The regulating piece 392f is an elastic piece whose base end is connected to the base plate 392a by notching the base plate 392a in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front and whose one end extending from the base end is a free end. formed as The direction in which one end of the restricting piece 392f extends from the base end is opposite to the biasing direction of the coil spring SP2 (the direction of force biasing the displacement unit 395 toward the initial biasing position). be. The restricting piece 392f has a convex portion 392f1 projecting from the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of one end side thereof, and the convex portion 392f1 is brought into contact with the displacement unit 395 (second displacement member 397). , the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to one side is restricted (the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the initial biasing position).

The base plate 392a includes an upright portion 392j projecting from the front side (arrow F direction side) and positioned between the outer peripheral surface of the first wall portion 392b and the inner peripheral surface of the second wall portion 392c. The standing portion 392j is a portion that restricts the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to the other side (prescribes the end of the displacement of the displacement unit 395), and is formed at a position facing the end of the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395. .

An opening 392g is formed in the base plate 392a on the inner peripheral side of the third wall 392h (between the third wall 392h and the coil spring SP2 facing each other). Wiring (not shown) extending from the vibration device 333 (see FIG. 18) can be routed to the rear side (outside) of the displacement unit 300 through the opening 392g.

The plate spring 393 is a plate-like spring (plate spring) that is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397 when the displacement unit 395 is displaced. inner peripheral side of the displacement trajectory). Further, the plate spring 393 has a protrusion 393a projecting toward the base plate 392a.

The protrusion 393a is inserted into a recess 392m formed in the base plate 392a. As a result, when the plate spring 393 is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397 and then elastically recovered as the second displacement member 397 passes, the projection 393a is moved to the recess 392m. It can abut (collide) with the inner surface.

The leaf spring 393 is arranged on the base plate 392a in an elastically deformed state. That is, when the displacement unit 395 (second displacement member 397) is not in contact with the leaf spring 393, the leaf spring 393 causes the projection 393a to abut (press) the inner surface of the recess 392m due to its elastic recovery force. It is considered to be in a state where

In addition, when the projection 393a is not in contact with the inner surface of the recess 392m (the pressure is released) and the plate spring 393 is elastically recovered, the plate spring 393 is in a position where the plate spring 393 contacts the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). placed. Thus, the leaf spring 393 can be brought into contact with the first displacement member 396 when the projection 393a of the leaf spring 393 is damaged. Therefore, even if the protrusion 393a of the plate spring 393 is damaged, the plate spring 393 is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397, and then elastically recovers as the second displacement member 397 passes. By doing so, the leaf spring 393 can be brought into contact (collision) with the first displacement member 396 .

The detection device 394 is a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement unit 395, and includes an irradiating unit that irradiates light and a light receiving unit that is arranged to face the light emitted from the irradiating unit. A detection piece 396f of the displacement unit 395 is arranged between them, and the position of the displacement unit 395 is detected based on the fact that the light is blocked.

The displacement unit 395 mainly comprises a first displacement member 396 and a second displacement member 397 rotatably supported on the first displacement member 396 .

The first displacement member 396 includes a body portion 396a formed in a shape curved in an arc when viewed from the front (a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape into two locations (positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees)), and a body portion 396a. A spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C-shape at one end in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction), and a center of the arc of the body portion 396a (inward in the radial direction) at the other end in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the body portion 396a. ), an engaging portion 396d positioned along the inner edge of the main body portion 396a and formed as a thinner portion than the other portions, and an outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 396a. a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from the outer edge of the main body 396a; and a shaft portion 396h provided.

The body portion 396a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the second wall portion 392c of the base plate 392a, and an inner diameter (the inner diameter of the engaging portion 396d) that is the outer diameter of the first wall portion 392b of the base plate 392a. It is set to a diameter larger than the diameter. Thereby, the first displacement member 396 can be arranged between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c of the base plate 392a.

More specifically, the inner diameter of the main body portion 396a (engagement portion 396d) is a virtual circle concentric with the first wall portion 392b, and is the first inner diameter of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2. The diameter is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of an imaginary circle passing through the outer peripheral surface of the portion (upright portion). As a result, the inner peripheral side of the engaging portion 396d slides on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first portions (standing portions) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2, thereby causing the first displacement. Circumferential displacement of member 396 is guided.

In addition, the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B side) of the main body portion 396a includes a first surface 396a1 that serves as the rear surface on the other end side (protruding portion 396b side) in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction), and the front surface of the first surface 396a1. side (arrow F direction side) and is formed from a second surface 396a2 that serves as a back surface on one end side (spring engaging portion 396c side) in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction). A wall surface 396g connects the step in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) between the . The first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 are formed parallel to each other.

The wall surface 396g is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the rear, and is a portion that engages the second displacement member 397 with the crank portion to restrict the displacement of the second displacement member 397. The first crank surface 396g1 , a second crank surface 396g2, and a contact surface 396g3 connecting them.

The first crank surface 396g1 is positioned radially outward (peripheral side) of the main body portion 396a, and the second crank surface 396g2 is positioned radially inward (inner peripheral side) of the main body portion 396a. The second crank surface 396g2 is positioned backward from the first crank surface 396g1 toward one end side (the side of the spring engaging portion 396c) in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the body portion 396a. A step is formed between the second crank surface 396g2 and the step is connected by the contact surface 396g3.

The protruding portion 396b is on the displacement trajectory of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320, and is on the displacement direction side (advancing direction) of the engaging piece 342b when the operating unit 320 is displaced from the initial position toward the terminal position. front side).

Therefore, when the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) is displaced from the initial position toward the end position, the protruding portion 396b is pushed by the engaging piece 342b, thereby moving in the displacement direction of the engaging piece 342b. In conjunction, the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biased position. As a result, the coil spring SP2 is elastically stretched, and the urging force of the coil spring SP2 imparts a predetermined operational feeling to the operation of the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330).

On the other hand, when the operation of the operation unit 320 (grip unit 330) is released at the end position (or between the start position and the end position) (for example, when the player releases the grip unit 330) , the displacement unit 395 is displaced (returned) toward the initial urging position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically stretched coil spring SP2. As a result, the engaging piece 342b is pushed by the projecting portion 396b, which is the opposite of the case described above, so that the projecting portion 396b is interlocked in the displacement direction, and the operation unit 320 (the gripping unit 330) is moved to the initial position. is displaced (returned) to

One end of the coil spring SP2 is engaged with the spring engaging piece 392k of the base plate 392a, and the other end is engaged with the spring engaging portion 396c of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). In the biased position, it is disposed in a resiliently stretched state. Therefore, the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) is biased toward the initial biasing position by the elastic recovery force of the coil spring SP2.

The thickness of the engaging portion 396d in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is set to be smaller than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 396a, and the rear surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 396a. formed contiguously with the rear surface of the That is, the front surface of the engaging portion 396d (the surface in the direction of arrow F) is positioned backward from the front surface of the main body portion 396a (the side in the direction of arrow B).

Here, when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is arranged (attached) to the base member 392 (base unit 391), the engagement portion 396d is formed by the base plate 392a and the inner first engagement piece. 392d1 and the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner second engaging piece 392d2. Therefore, by forming the engaging portion 396d to be smaller (thinner) than the main body portion 396a, the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 project from the base plate 392a. The installation dimension (the erected height of the first portion (the erected portion)) can be reduced (shortened). As a result, the rigidity of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 is ensured, and the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 elastically deform or break. can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 396 can be stably displaced.

The engaging portion 396d is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view by partially cutting out from the edge portion on the radially inner side (first wall portion 392b side) toward the main body portion 396a side (diametrically outer side). An inner first recessed portion 396d1 and an inner second recessed portion 396d2 are provided. The inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 are used when disposing (attaching) the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) to the base member 392 (base unit 391). 1 engaging piece 392d1 and the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner second engaging piece 392d2 are notches for inserting into the front side of the engaging portion 396d. The circumferential distance between the 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 is set to be the same as the circumferential distance between the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2. .

The outer concave portion 396e allows the outer second engagement piece 392e2 to be attached to the first displacement member 396 when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is arranged (attached) to the base member 392 (base unit 391). This is a notch for inserting through the front side of the body portion 396a. Therefore, when the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 of the base member 392 are inserted into the inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2, respectively, the outer recessed portion 396e is , is formed at a position where the outer second engaging piece 392e2 can be received (inserted).

The inner first engaging piece 392d1, the inner second engaging piece 392d2 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are inserted into the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2 and the outer recessed portion 396e, respectively. In a state where the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is arranged at a position where it is possible, the outer first engaging piece 392e1 is adjacent to the other end in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the first displacement member 396. (That is, it is arranged at a position not overlapping the first displacement member 396 when viewed from the front) (see FIG. 31).

The outer recessed portion 396e is formed between the inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 in the extending direction of the main body portion 396a. As a result, the portions whose rigidity is lowered by being recessed can be dispersed in the extending direction of the main body portion 396a. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the main body portion 396a due to concentration of low-rigidity portions on a portion of the main body portion 396a.

The thickness of the detection piece 396f is set to be smaller (thinner) than the thickness of the body portion 396a, and the front surface is raised from the front surface of the first displacement member 396 (in the direction of the arrow F). be done. In the second wall portion 392c of the base member 392, a recessed portion 392c1 is formed (recessed) in a region overlapping the displacement trajectory of the detection piece 396f in a front view. 396f protrudes radially outward from the second wall portion 392c. Thereby, interference between the second wall portion 392c and the detection piece 396f can be suppressed.

The shaft portion 396h is a cylindrical shaft that rotatably supports the second displacement member 397, and protrudes from the second surface 396a2 of the main body portion 396a toward the back side.

The projection dimension (projection height) of the shaft portion 396h from the second surface 396a2 is determined by the distance T1 (see FIG. 30(c)) in the front-rear direction from the first surface 396a1 to the back side end of the main body portion 396a. are also set to small dimensions. As a result, when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395 ) is displaced with respect to the base member 392 , it is possible to prevent the projecting tip of the shaft portion 396 h from abutting the base plate 392 a of the base member 392 . Thereby, breakage of the shaft portion 396h can be suppressed. In addition, the frictional resistance can be suppressed, and the displacement of the first displacement member 396 can be stabilized.

The second displacement member 397 is formed in a substantially triangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 397a is formed through the substantially central portion of the plate-like body in the front-rear direction. In the following description, three tip end portions (corner portions) of the second displacement member 397 in front view are referred to as a first corner portion 397b, a second corner portion 397c and a third corner portion 397d.

The shaft support hole 397a is a hole into which the shaft portion 396h of the first displacement member 396 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 396h. Thereby, the second displacement member 397 is rotatable around the shaft portion 396h.

The second displacement member 397 has a thickness dimension T2 (see FIG. 30(c)) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) that is the distance in the front-rear direction from the first surface 396a1 to the back side end of the main body portion 396a. The dimension is set smaller than T1 (see FIG. 30(c)) (T2>T1).

As a result, when the second displacement member 397 is disposed on the first displacement member 396, the second displacement member 397 is positioned between the opposing second surface 396a2 of the first displacement member 396 and the base plate 392a of the base member 392. It is possible to suppress being sandwiched between As a result, the second displacement member 397 can be reliably rotated.

The first corner portion 397b is arranged on the radially inner side of the main body portion 396a of the first displacement member 396 (the center side of the arc of the main body portion 396a, the first wall portion 392b side). When the second displacement member 397 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 396, the first corner portion 397b is radially inward ( A position (first position (see FIG. 37(b))) projecting toward the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a and the first wall portion 392b side, and a position radially outside the first position (second position (See FIG. 38(c))). At the first position, a portion of the displacement trajectory of the first corner portion 397b when the first displacement member 396 is displaced is set to overlap with the plate spring 393 of the base unit 391. The displacement trajectory of the first corner portion 397 b when the one-displacement member 396 is displaced is set to a position that does not overlap (is different from) the plate spring 393 of the base unit 391 .

The second corner portion 397c is arranged closer to the wall surface 396g than the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h). When viewed from the front, the distance T3 (see FIG. 30(b)) from the center of the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) to the tip of the second corner portion 397c is the distance from the first crank surface 396g1 of the wall surface 396g to the shaft support hole. 397a (shaft portion 396h) to the center of distance T4 (see FIG. 30(b)) (T4>T3), and the axial support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) extends from the second crank surface 396g2 of the wall surface 396g. 396h) to the center (T3>T5).

As a result, the displacement locus of the second corner portion 397c when the second displacement member 397 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 396 around the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) is defined by the contact surface 396g3 of the wall surface 396g. can be set to overlap with As a result, the side wall of the second corner portion 397c on the side of the first corner portion 397b is brought into contact with the contact surface 396g3, and the rotation (displacement) of the second displacement member 397 with respect to the first displacement member 396 can be restricted.

Therefore, the wall surface 396g formed by the step between the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 of the body portion 396a can be used to restrict the rotation (displacement) of the second displacement member 397. There is no need to form a portion that restricts displacement of the second displacement member 397 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement unit 395 from increasing in size, and to easily secure the installation space for the displacement unit 395 .

The third corner portion 397d is located on the opposite side of the first corner portion 397b across the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) (the radially outer side of the body portion 396a of the first displacement member 396 (the arc of the body portion 396a). on the side opposite to the center of the second wall portion 392c)).

The distance from the tip of the third corner portion 397d to the center of the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) is the distance from the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) to the radially outer edge of the main body portion 396a. The distance is set to be larger than the distance, and the rotation (displacement) of the second displacement member 397 with respect to the first displacement member 396 causes the position protruding from the radially outer edge of the main body portion 396a and the second displacement member of the main body portion 396a. It is displaced between the two surfaces 396a2 and the position overlapping in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, an attachment method for attaching the displacement unit 395 to the base unit 391 will be described. 31 is a front view of the base unit 390. FIG. 32(a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit 390 taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 31, and FIG. 32(b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit 390 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. It is a diagram. 33(a) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the base unit 390 along line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa in FIG. 27(a), and FIG. 33(b) is a base unit along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 27(a). 390 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram.

31, 32(a), and 32(b), the position (hereinafter referred to as "positioning position") where the displacement unit 395 is pushed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) with respect to the base unit 391. 33(a) and 33(b), the state in which the displacement unit 395 is placed in the initial biased position is shown. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, in order to attach (arrange) the displacement unit 395 to the base unit 391, first, the inner first concave portion 396d1 of the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395), The inner second recessed portion 396d2 and the outer recessed portion 396e correspond to the inner first engagement piece 392d1, the inner second engagement piece 392d2 and the outer second engagement piece of the base member 392 (base unit 391). A first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is arranged at a position overlapping 392e2 in a front view, and the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is directed toward the base plate 392a of the base member 392 (base unit 391). (in the direction of arrow B).

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the displacement unit 395 is arranged such that the second displacement member 397 is attached to the front end (in the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion 392f1 of the regulation piece 392f of the base plate 392a. side), and the restricting piece 392f is pushed toward the base plate 392a while being elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is arranged at the positioning position.

Here, in the second displacement member 397, only the shaft portion 396h of the first displacement member 396 is inserted into the shaft support hole 397a (that is, no retainer is provided), and the shaft portion 396h is connected to the shaft portion 396h. It is displaceable in the direction. Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is attached (arranged) to the base unit 391, it is necessary to assemble so that the second displacement member 397 does not drop off from the first displacement member 396 (does not drop off from the shaft portion 396h). In this case, if the operator works while holding the second displacement member 397 with his or her fingers, the work efficiency will deteriorate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the positioning position, the displacement unit 395 is moved to the base unit while the projecting tip of the protrusion 392f1 of the regulation piece 392f is brought into contact with the second displacement member 397. 391 , thereby preventing the second displacement member 397 from falling off (falling off) from the shaft portion 396 h of the first displacement member 396 . As a result, the operator does not need to hold the second displacement member 397 with his or her fingers, and work efficiency can be improved accordingly.

In particular, since the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f protrudes toward the displacement unit 395, when the displacing unit 395 is assembled to the base unit 391, the projecting portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f should be formed from an early stage. The tip can abut against the second displacement member 397 . Therefore, it is possible to further improve workability when assembling the displacement unit 395 to the base unit 391 .

After disposing the displacement unit 395 at the positioning position (see FIG. 32), next, the displacement unit 395 is moved to the other circumferential end side of the main body portion 396a (the side where the projecting portion 396b is formed; ) and the lower side in FIG. 33(b)) are displaced in the direction of approaching the standing portion 392j of the base plate 329a.

In this case, the displacement unit 395 moves while bringing the second displacement member 397 into contact with the projection 392f1 of the regulation piece 392f. , the elastically deformed restricting piece 392f is restored to its initial shape (restored to a non-elastically deformed state), and the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the initial urging position.

When the displacement unit 395 is placed at the initial urging position, the side surface of the projection 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f abuts against the side surface of the second displacement member 397, thereby moving the displacement unit 395 to the positioning position (shown in FIG. 32). position) is regulated.

At the initial urging position, as described above, the elastic recovery force of the coil spring SP2 displaces the displacement unit 395 toward the positioning position (i. 392f1 (upper side in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b)).

Further, when the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the initial biasing position, the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e of the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) However, positions (different position).

As a result, the engaging portion 396d of the displacement unit 395 is arranged between the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 and the base plate 392a. be done. Further, a body portion 396a of the displacement unit 395 is provided between the outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 and the base plate 392a.

That is, when viewed from the front, the second portions (projecting portions) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 are located inside the engaging portion 396d of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). The outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are formed in the non-forming region of the first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2. They are arranged at positions overlapping with the non-forming region of the outer recessed portion 396e in 396a.

As a result, when the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) is displaced to the front side (direction of arrow F) with respect to the base unit 391, the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are displaced by the displacement unit 395 ( The outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are engaged with the main body portion 396a of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396), respectively. is thus regulated. Thereby, the displacement unit 395 is held by the base unit 391 in a state where only displacement in the circumferential direction is permitted.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the first displacement member 396 is not formed with the first inner recessed portion 396d1, the second inner recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e, the displacement unit 395 is configured as the inner first engaging portion. At a position where the piece 392d1, the inner second engaging piece 392d2, the outer first engaging piece 392e1, and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 do not overlap when viewed from the front, the base unit 390 (the base plate 392a) is pushed (the restricting piece 392f is elastically deformed (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the amount of displacement of the displacement unit 395 from the pushed position to the initial urging position becomes large, and the workability of the assembling work is lowered. In addition, it is necessary to secure a space for pushing the displacement unit 395 into the base unit 390 (base plate 392a). Poor space efficiency.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 396 is formed with an inner first recessed portion 396d1, an inner second recessed portion 396d2 and an outer recessed portion 396e. The inner first engaging piece 392d1, the inner second engaging piece 392d2, and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 of the base member 392 are inserted through. That is, the overlapping margin between the displacement unit 395 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 at the position where the displacement unit 395 is pushed into the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) can be increased. As a result, the amount of displacement of the displacement unit 395 from the pushed position (positioning position) to the initial urging position can be reduced, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved. In addition, the space secured in the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) for pushing in the displacement unit 395 can be reduced accordingly, so that the space efficiency can be improved (space for erecting ribs and forming other parts). can be ensured).

In addition, the second surface 396a2 of the main body portion 396a is arranged on the front side of the restricting piece 392f, and the restricting piece 392f is invisible in a front view. This makes it difficult to access the restricting piece 392f from the front side of the base unit 391, and suppresses illegal cancellation of the restriction of the displacement unit 395 by the restricting piece 392f.

The distance from the contact position between the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f and the second displacement member 397 in the extending direction of the body portion 396a to the tip portion of the second surface 396a2 (the end portion on the side of the spring engaging portion 396c) is , is set larger than the displaceable distance of the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395). This makes it difficult to access the restriction piece 392f from the front side of the base unit 391 even after the first displacement member (displacement unit 395) is displaced.

Furthermore, the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f protrudes into the space formed by the step between the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 of the body portion 396a. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the thickness of the base unit 391 from increasing in the front-rear direction when the displacement unit 395 is arranged on the base member 392 .

Next, displacement of the displacement unit 395 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a perspective exploded view of the displacement unit 300, and FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c) are front views of the base unit 390. FIG.

34, the displacement unit 300 is disassembled between the base unit 390 and the intermediate member 380, and illustration of the coil spring SP1 arranged between the base unit 390 and the intermediate member 380 is omitted. 35(a) to 35(c), the outer shape of the engaging piece 342b of the back side member 342 of the operation unit 320 is illustrated with a dashed line.

FIG. 35(a) shows a state in which the operating unit 320 is placed in the initial position and the displacement unit 395 is placed in the initial urging position, and FIG. 35(c) shows the operating unit 320 in the terminal position. , the displacing unit 395 is placed at a position (hereinafter referred to as a "terminal interlocking position") displaced from the initial urging position to the maximum, and FIG. , the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is arranged at a position (hereinafter referred to as "abutment position") where the displacement unit 395 abuts.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35(a), when the displacement unit 300 is assembled, the engaging piece 342b of the rear side member 342 has a tip that extends from the side surface (inner side) of the projecting portion 396b of the first displacement member 396. It is arranged at a position facing the side surface connecting to the first recessed portion 396d1. In addition, when the operation unit 320 is arranged at the initial position, the engaging piece 342b is arranged with a predetermined gap from the side surface of the projecting portion 396b.

As shown in FIG. 35( b ), when the operating unit 320 is displaced with respect to the guide unit 350 , the engaging piece 342 b is rotated (displaced) in the same direction as the operating unit 320 . As a result, the engaging piece 342b comes into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 396b.

The position of the operating unit 320 when the projecting portion 396b abuts against the engaging piece 342b is set between the initial position and the first position. As a result, as described above, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 from the initial position, the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d (see FIG. 26(b)) of the second guide area. In front, the engaging piece 342b can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 396b. Therefore, before the guided member 344 reaches the first position (the guided member 344 reaches the fourth guide surface 351d), a resistance force (biasing force of the coil spring SP2) opposing the pushing direction of the grasping unit 330 is applied. be able to. As a result, the impact when the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed, and damage to the guided member 344 and the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c), after the engaging piece 342b abuts against the projecting portion 396b, the engaging piece 342b is displaced to the end position while the operation unit 320 is displaced to the end position. It is rotated (displaced) in the same direction as the operation unit 320 . That is, since the contact between the engaging piece 342b and the projecting portion 396b is maintained, the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2 can be continuously applied as an operational feeling when operating the operating unit 320. can.

In addition, at a position adjacent to the projecting portion 396b when the operation unit 320 is arranged at the terminal position (on the front side of the projecting portion 396b in the direction of movement when moving toward the terminal position), there is a base plate 392a. A standing portion 392j is provided. As a result, when the coil spring SP2 of the displacement unit 395 or the guided member 344 is damaged, the displacement unit 395 is brought into contact with the standing portion 392j to prevent the displacement unit 395 from being displaced beyond the terminal interlocking position. can be suppressed.

A plate spring 393 provided in the base unit 391 is provided on the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 395 . Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial urging position to the terminal interlocking position, during the displacement (in this embodiment, immediately before reaching the terminal interlocking position), the second displacement member of the displacement unit 395 397 can contact the leaf spring 393 and elastically deform the leaf spring 393 . Details of the plate spring 393 will be described later.

The displacement unit 395 is biased toward the initial biasing position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2, as described above. Therefore, when the operation of the operation unit 320 is released (for example, when the player releases the grip unit 330), the displacement unit 395 is displaced toward the initial urging position. The protrusion 396b of the unit 395 pushes back the engaging piece 342b, and as a result, the operation unit 320 is returned to its initial position.

Next, the leaf spring 393 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 is a front view of the base unit 390, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are partially enlarged front views of the base unit 390. FIG.

36 to 38, the first displacement member 396 is shown transparently, and the outer shape of the first displacement member 396 is shown by two-dot chain lines. Also, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the displacement unit 395 is disposed in the initial urging position.

FIGS. 37(a) to 38(d) sequentially show transition states when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial urging position to the terminal interlocking position, and FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d) , the transition state when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the terminal interlocking position to the initial biasing position.

As shown in FIG. 36, the plate spring 393 has a free end on the opposite side of the one end fixed to the base member 392, and the plate surface faces the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). is arranged in Therefore, the plate spring 393 is elastically deformable in a direction in which the other end side approaches or separates from the displacement unit 395 . Note that the leaf spring 393 is arranged in such a posture that one end side is closer to the coil spring SP2 than the other end side.

The leaf spring 393 has a protruding portion that is bent into a generally triangular shape in a front view between one end side and the other end side and that protrudes the bent tip toward the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). At least a portion of the protruding portion of the plate spring 393 on the bending tip side is arranged at a position overlapping the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member 397 in a front view, and when the displacement unit 395 is displaced, as will be described later. , the side surface of the projecting portion abuts (presses) against the second displacing member 397, whereby the plate spring 393 is elastically deformed.

The leaf spring 393 has a protrusion 393a projecting from the edge on the other end side toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The protrusion 393a is inserted inside the recess 392m of the base plate 392a, and when the plate spring 393 is placed at the initial position (the plate spring 393 is unloaded), the protrusion 393a contacts the inner surface of the recess 392m. touched.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37(a), when the displacement unit 395 is placed at the initial urging position, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the second side wall 397f of the second displacement member 397 (first corner A side surface connecting the portion 397b and the third corner portion 397d) abuts against the restricting piece 392f (the convex portion 392f1) of the base plate 392a. As a result, the second displacement member 397 is arranged in a posture in which the distal end portion of the first corner portion 397b protrudes radially inward of the first displacement member 396 (main body portion 396a) in a front view.

When the operation unit 320 is operated to displace the displacement unit 395 from the initial biasing position toward the terminal interlocking position, the second displacement member 397 is moved to the second position as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c). A portion of one side wall 397e (side surface connecting the first corner portion 397b and the second corner portion 397c) on the side of the first corner portion 397b abuts on the leaf spring 393 (side surface of the projecting portion). 393 is elastically deformed.

In this case, the second displacement member 397 is elastically deformed because the second corner 397c (the first side wall 397e on the side of the second corner 397c) is in contact with the contact surface 396g3 of the first displacement member 396. Due to the elastic recovery force of the plate spring 393, the rotation of the second displacement member 397 around the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) is restricted. That is, the protrusion amount by which the tip portion of the first corner portion 397b protrudes radially inward of the first displacement member 396 (main body portion 396a) does not change.

Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced to the terminal interlocking position, the first corner portion 397b presses the side surface of the projecting portion of the plate spring 393, thereby elastically deforming the plate spring 393 to the opposite side of the displacement unit 395. As shown in FIG. 37(d), when the first corner 397b climbs over the projecting portion (projecting tip) of the leaf spring 393, the elastic deformation of the leaf spring 393 is restored (the leaf spring 393 is in the unloaded state). is restored to its original shape). The amount of elastic deformation of the plate spring 393 is maximized when the first corner portion 397b of the second displacement member 397 gets over the projecting portion (protruding tip) of the plate spring 393 .

In this case, as the plate spring 393 is elastically deformed, the protrusion 393a is separated from the inner surface of the recess 392m of the base plate 392a. collision). As a result, when the operation unit 320 (displacement unit 395) is displaced to the end position (end interlocking position), it is possible to generate an impact due to contact (collision) between the protrusion 393a and the recess 392m. As a result, vibration is transmitted to the hand of the player who operates (holds) the operation unit 320 (holding unit 330), making it easier for the player to recognize that the operation unit 320 has been displaced to the end position.

Also, when the operation unit 320 is operated to the terminal position, vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand, so that the operational feeling can be improved.

Similarly, when the first corner 397b of the second displacement member 397 climbs over the projecting portion (protruding tip) of the plate spring 393, the player who operates the operation unit 320 receives from the leaf spring 393 before and after the climbing motion. Reaction force (elastic recovery force) can be reversed. That is, the reaction force from the leaf spring 393 is gradually increased until the first corner portion 397b reaches the projecting tip (apex) of the projecting portion of the leaf spring 393, and the maximum reaction force is generated when overcoming. On the other hand, the reaction force can be rapidly reduced immediately after overcoming. Thereby, when operating the operation unit 320, a click feeling can be formed, and the operational feeling can be improved. In particular, when this click feeling is generated, the vibration due to the collision of the projection 393a with the concave portion 392m can be transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d), when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the terminal interlocking position to the initial urging position, the second side wall 397f (first corner portion) of the second displacement member 397 397b and the third corner 397d), the portion on the first corner 397b side comes into contact with the side surface of the protrusion of the plate spring 393. As shown in FIG.

In this case, as the displacement unit 395 is displaced toward the initial urging position, the second displacement member 397 moves the second corner 397c (the first side wall 397e on the side of the second corner 397c) to the first position. The displacement member 396 is rotated in a rotational direction (counterclockwise in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c)) away from the contact surface 396g3 of the displacement member 396. As shown in FIG. As a result, the first corner portion 397 b of the second displacement member 397 is retracted in the direction away from the plate spring 393 . As a result, the leaf spring 393 is hardly elastically deformed. Therefore, the displacement unit 395 (operation unit 320) can be smoothly returned to the initial urging position (initial position).

When the displacement unit 395 reaches the initial urging position, the first corner 397b passes through the protrusion (bent end) of the leaf spring 393 as shown in FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d). After that, the portion of the second side wall 397f (the side surface connecting the first corner portion 397b and the third corner portion 397d) of the second displacement member 397 on the side of the third corner portion 397d becomes the restricting piece 392f (the convex portion 392f1 ). As a result, the second displacement member 397 rotates the second corner 397c (first side wall 397e on the side of the second corner 397c) in the rotational direction (Fig. )), and the first corner portion 397b advances (protrudes) in a direction approaching the leaf spring 393. As shown in FIG. That is, the second displacement member 397 can be returned to the initial position. As a result, as described above, it is possible to reliably transmit vibration and provide a click feeling when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial urging position toward the terminal interlocking position.

Note that the displacement (return) of the displacement unit 395 from the end interlocking position to the initial urging position is performed by the elastic recovery force of the coil spring SP2. The second side wall 397f) abuts (collides) with the restricting piece 392f (the convex portion 392f1). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the object that abuts (collides) with the second displacement member 397 (second side wall 397f) is the restricting piece 392f (convex portion 392f1), the restricting piece 392f (convex portion 392f1) can be elastically deformed to mitigate the impact at the time of contact (collision). As a result, damage (bending or breakage) of the shaft portion 396h that supports the second displacement member 397 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to Figures 39 and 40, the displacement unit 2395 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement unit 395 is rotationally displaced has been described, but in the second embodiment, the case where the displacement unit 2395 is linearly displaced will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c) are front views of the base unit 2390 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) are the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39(a). is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 2390 in FIG.

Note that FIG. 39(a) shows a state in which the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 16(a)) is arranged at the initial position and the displacement unit 2395 is arranged at the initial urging position, and FIG. , the operating unit 320 is located at the terminal position and the displacement unit 2395 is located at the terminal interlocking position, and in FIG. A state in which the piece 342b is arranged at the abutment position where the piece 342b abuts against the displacement unit 2395 (projecting portion 396b) is illustrated. 39 and 40, only the outer shape of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is illustrated with chain lines. 39(a), 40(b), and 40(c) respectively correspond to FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 40(c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the base unit 2390 in the second embodiment includes a base unit 2391, a displacement unit 2395 arranged on the base unit 2391, and the displacement unit 2395 attached to the base unit 2391. and a coil spring SP2 for biasing.

The base unit 2391 includes a base member 2392 arranged inside the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and a leaf spring arranged on the base member 2392. 393 and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 2392 .

The base member 2392 includes a base plate 2392a, a first wall portion 392b erected from the base plate 2392a toward the front side (arrow F direction side) and formed in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and the first wall portion 392b. A second wall portion 2392c standing radially outward of the first wall portion 392b from 392b, a third wall portion 2392h standing frontward from the base plate 2392a, and a front side from the base plate 2392a. A spring engaging piece 2392k protruding toward the top, an inner first engaging piece 2392d1, and a restricting piece 2392f formed on the inside of the base plate 2392a by notching it in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. Prepare for.

Note that the base plate 2392a in the second embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the annular member 310 on which the base member 2392 is arranged has an inner peripheral edge shape larger than the outer shape (outer peripheral edge shape) of the base plate 2392a.

The second wall portion 2392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 2395, which will be described later. deferred.

An outer first engaging piece 2392e1 and an outer second engaging piece 2392e2 are projected from the second wall portion 2392c toward the displacement unit 2395 from the standing tip side (front side) thereof. The outer first engaging piece 2392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 2392e2 are portions that restrict the displacement unit 2395 arranged in the base unit 2391 from falling off toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed at a predetermined distance along the extending direction of the second wall portion 2392c (displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395).

The outer first engaging piece 2392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 2392e2 are portions that prevent the displacing unit 2395 arranged in the base unit 2391 from falling off toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed at a position separated from the base plate 2392a by the thickness of the displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) disposed in 2391 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) can be disposed in a state of being sandwiched between the base plate 2392a and the outer first engaging piece 2392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 2392e2 (Fig. 40(a) )reference).

The third wall portion 2392h is formed along the edge of the base plate 2392a, and the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 39) is curved in a semicircular shape coaxial with the first wall portion 392b in front view. A second cylindrical portion 362b (not shown) of the second annular member 362 to which the base unit 2390 is fastened is formed to have the same outer shape as the third wall portion 2392h in rear view. As a result, when the base unit 2390 is fastened to the operation unit 320, the rear side of the second cylindrical portion 362b and the third wall portion 2392h are brought into contact with each other, so that the inside of the second cylindrical portion 362b can be moved from the outside of the slot machine 10. It is possible to prevent an illegal member from being inserted into the

The spring engagement piece 2392k is a portion that engages one end of the coil spring SP2 that biases the displacement unit 2395, and protrudes from the front side of the base plate 2392a toward the side opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395. It is formed in an L shape in side view with a bent tip.

The inner first engaging piece 2392d1 is a member that prevents the displacing unit 2395 from coming off (removing) toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed. The inner first engaging piece 2392d1 has a first portion (upright portion) erected from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 2392a, and a second wall extending from the projecting end of the first portion. and a second portion (protruding portion) that protrudes toward the portion 2392c and is located on the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395 (a position that overlaps the displacement locus when viewed from the front). As a result, the displacement unit 2395 arranged in front of the base plate 2392a can be arranged in a state of being sandwiched between the base plate 2392a and the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 ( See FIG. 40(a)).

The restricting piece 2392f is a portion that restricts the displacement of the displacement unit 2395 to one side (initial bias position side), and is formed on the back side of the displacement unit 2395 disposed along the second wall portion 2392c. It is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395 when viewed from the front.

The restricting piece 2392f is formed by cutting the base plate 2392a into a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and is formed as an elastic piece having one end connected to the base plate 2392a and the other end being a free end. The other end of the restricting piece 2392f is provided with a convex portion 392f1 projecting toward the front side (the side of the displacement unit 2395, the direction of the arrow F), and the displacement unit 2395 is brought into contact with the convex portion 392f1. , the displacement of the displacement unit 2395 to one side is restricted.

The displacement unit 2395 is mainly composed of a first displacement member 2396 formed in a linear shape (substantially rectangular shape in a front view) as a whole when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 397 pivotally supported by the first displacement member 2396. Prepare for.

The first displacement member 2396 includes a main body portion 2396a extending linearly, a spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape in a front view at one longitudinal end of the main body portion 2396a, and a main body portion 2396a. A projecting portion 396b projecting from the side surface of the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the first wall portion 392b of the base plate 2392a, and a engaging portion projecting from the side surface of the main body portion 2396a opposite to the second wall portion 2392c. A joint portion 2396d, an outer recessed portion 2396e formed by notching the edge portion of the main body portion 2396a on the second wall portion 2392c side, and a detector projecting from the side surface of the main body portion 2396a on the second wall portion 2392c side. It mainly includes a piece 396f and a cylindrical shaft portion 396h that protrudes from the back surface of the main body portion 2396a.

The length of the main body portion 2396a in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which it extends linearly) is set to be shorter than the extension dimension of the second wall portion 2392c. Also, the displacement amount of the displacement unit 2395 is set to a dimension (displacement amount) smaller than the difference between the extension dimension of the second wall portion 2392c and the longitudinal length of the main body portion 2396a. Accordingly, when the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) is displaced along the second wall portion 2392c, the body portion 2396a can always be positioned adjacent to the second wall portion 2392c.

In addition, the body portion 2396a has a first surface 396a1 that forms the back surface on the other longitudinal end side, and a second surface 396a2 that is positioned closer to the front than the first surface 396a1 and forms the back surface on the one longitudinal end side. , and a wall surface 396g connecting the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

In the second embodiment, the spring engaging piece 2392k of the base plate 2392a with which the coil spring SP2 is engaged is formed on the extension of the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395. As shown in FIG. The coil spring SP2 is engaged with the spring engaging piece 2392k at a position along the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395 (longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 2396), and is arranged in an elastically tensile and deformed state. be done. Therefore, the coil spring SP2 can apply an urging force (elastic recovery force) toward the initial urging position to the displacement unit 2395 .

The engaging portion 2396d has a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) smaller than the thickness dimension of the main body portion 2396a, and is formed at a position contiguous with the rear surface of the main body portion 2396a. That is, the front surface of the engaging portion 2396d is located on the rear side with respect to the front surface of the main body portion 2396a.

Further, the engaging portion 2396d is formed between the base plate 2392a and the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 in a state where the first displacement member 2396 is arranged on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). portion). Therefore, since the thickness dimension of the engaging portion 2396d is set to be smaller (thinner) than the thickness dimension of the main body portion 2396a, the projecting distance (first portion) of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 from the base plate 2392a (Standing height of (Standing portion)) can be shortened. As a result, the rigidity of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 can be ensured, and damage to the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 due to the reaction force acting from the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) can be suppressed.

The engaging portion 2396d includes an inner first recessed portion 2396d1 formed by partially notching the outer edge along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 2396a. The inner first recessed portion 2396d1 serves as an engaging portion for the second portion (protruding portion) of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 when the first displacement member 2396 is disposed on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). 2396d, and is formed with an inner edge shape that is larger than the shape of the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 when viewed from the front.

The outer recessed portion 2396e allows the outer second engagement piece 2392e2 to pass through the front side of the main body portion 2396a of the first displacement member 2396 when the first displacement member 2396 is arranged on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). The notch is formed in the outer edge along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2396a on the side opposite to the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 so as to have an inner edge shape that is larger than the front view shape of the outer second engaging piece 2392e2. .

The distance between the outer recessed portion 2396e and the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the main body portion 2396a is , and the separation distance of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1.

As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 of the base member 2392 are connected to the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 of the first displacement member 2396, Further, by inserting the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) into the outer concave portion 396e, the base member 2392 (base unit 2391) can be arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the base unit 2390 is such that the tip of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15) protrudes from the body portion 2396a of the first displacement member 2396. 396b, and when the operation unit 320 is placed at the initial position, the projecting portion 396b and the tip of the engaging piece 342b are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween.

When the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15) is operated by the player from the initial position and the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is rotated (displaced), as shown in FIGS. 39(b) and 40(b). Then, the engaging piece 342b is brought into contact with the projecting portion 396b of the displacement unit 2395. As shown in FIG.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the position where the engaging piece 342b abuts against the projecting portion 396b is shifted between the initial position and the first position of the operating unit 320. position. As a result, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 from the initial position, before the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d (see FIG. 26(b)) of the second guide area, the engagement The piece 342b can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 396b.

Therefore, before the guided member 344 reaches the first position (the guided member 344 reaches the fourth guide surface 351d), a resistance force (biasing force of the coil spring SP2) opposing the pushing direction of the grasping unit 330 is applied. be able to. As a result, the impact when the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed, and damage to the guided member 344 and the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed.

When the operation unit 320 is displaced from the abutment position to the end position (that is, the operation unit 320 is further rotationally displaced from the position where the engaging piece 342b abuts on the projecting portion 396b), FIGS. As shown in 40(c), the displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) is linearly displaced (directly moved) along its longitudinal direction as the engaging piece 342b is displaced. As a result, the displacement unit 2395 is placed in the displacement end position.

In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, after the engaging piece 342b is brought into contact with the protruding portion 396b, the engaging piece 342b is held by the operating unit 320 while the operating unit 320 is displaced to the terminal position. is displaced in the same direction as That is, since the contact between the engaging piece 342b and the projecting portion 396b is maintained, the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2 can be continuously applied as an operational feeling when operating the operating unit 320. can.

A plate spring 393 arranged in the base unit 2391 is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 2395 . Therefore, when the displacement unit 2395 is displaced from the initial urging position to the terminal interlocking position, during the displacement (just before reaching the terminal interlocking position as in the first embodiment), the displacement unit 2395 can contact the leaf spring 393 and elastically deform the leaf spring 393 . The elastic deformation of the plate spring 393 accompanying the displacement of the displacement unit 2395 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The displacement unit 2395 is biased toward the initial biasing position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2, as described above. Therefore, when the operation of the operation unit 320 is released (for example, when the player releases the grip unit 330), the displacement unit 2395 is displaced toward the initial urging position. The protrusion 396b of the unit 395 pushes back the engaging piece 342b, and as a result, the operation unit 320 is returned to its initial position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the engagement piece 342b of the rotationally displaced operation unit 320 is brought into contact with the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) that is linearly displaced (directly moved). Since the first displacement member 2396 is displaced (the engagement piece 342b slides on the projecting portion 396b), the displacement distance in the circumferential direction of the engagement piece 342b when the operation unit 320 is displaced is relatively large. The linear displacement distance of the unit 2395 can be reduced. As a result, the force required to operate the operation unit 320 when displacing the displacement unit 2395 can be reduced. As a result, the player can easily operate the operation unit 320 . Moreover, since the space required for arranging the displacement unit 2395 can be reduced, the size of the base unit 2390 can be reduced.

The contact surface of the protruding portion 396b with which the engaging piece 342b contacts is formed as a straight flat surface in a front view. direction). The contact surface of the protruding portion 396b is inclined in a direction away from the engaging piece 342b toward the protruding distal end side of the protruding portion 396b (the side opposite to the main body portion 396a). Further, the side surface of the engaging piece 342b that abuts on the protruding portion 396b is curved in an arc shape that protrudes toward the protruding portion 396b when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the engaging piece 342b is displaced in the rotational direction and the projecting portion 396b is displaced in the linear direction, the engaging piece 432b can be easily slid on the projecting portion 396b. displacement can be stabilized.

Here, in the second embodiment, in a state where the operation unit 320 (displacement unit 2395) is arranged at the terminal position (terminal interlocking position), the engagement piece 342b abuts on the protrusion 396b, and the operation unit 320 (engagement unit 2395) The direction connecting the center of rotation of the mating piece 342b) and the engaging piece 342b is parallel to the direction of linear displacement (linear motion) of the displacement unit 2395 when viewed from the front, and the engaging piece 342b of the projecting portion 396b The contact surface may be configured to be orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement (linear motion) of the displacement unit 2395 when viewed from the front. That is, the rotational direction of the engaging piece 342b and the linear displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395 may be orthogonal to each other. According to this, by setting the second guide surface 351b (see FIG. 22(d)) of the guide unit 350 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (arrow FB direction) of the operation unit 320, the player can After the operation unit 320 is rotationally displaced to the end position by , the operation unit 320 can be maintained at the end position. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 320 from returning to the initial position due to the urging forces of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14) and the coil spring SP2. As a result, it is possible to add variations to the operation method of the operation unit 320 and improve the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a base unit 3390 in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the inner first engaging piece 392d1 of the base member 392, the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e of the first displacement member 396 are provided. At the position (phase) where the second engaging piece 392d2 and the second outer engaging piece 392e2 can be inserted, the displacement unit 395 is moved backward (in the direction of the arrow B) with respect to the base member 392 while elastically deforming the restricting piece 392f. A case has been described in which the displacement unit 395 is arranged in the base unit 391 by rotating the displacement unit 395 (sliding displacement along the second wall portion 392c) after being pushed in, but the displacement unit 395 is arranged in the third embodiment. 3395 is pushed into the base member 3392 toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) (that is, the inner first locking portion 3392d3, the inner second locking portion 3392d4, the outer first locking portion 3392e3, and the outer second locking portion 3392e3). The displacement unit 3395 is disposed on the base unit 3391 only by elastically deforming the stop portion 3392e4. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 41(a) is a front view of the base unit 3390 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 41(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 3390 along line XLIb-XLIb in FIG. 41(a). 41(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 3390 along line XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41(a).

As shown in FIG. 41, the base unit 3390 in the third embodiment includes a base unit 3391, a displacement unit 3395 disposed on the base unit 3391, and a coil for biasing the displacement unit 3395 against the base unit 3391. and a spring SP2.

The base unit 3391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral edge shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is arranged inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 3392 , a leaf spring 393 arranged on the base member 3392 , and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 3392 .

The base member 3392 includes a base plate 3392a, a first wall portion 392b erected in a semicircular shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 3392a, and a center of the first wall portion 392b. A second wall portion 3392c which is formed in a coaxial semicircular arc shape and erected from the base plate 3392a toward the front side, a first wall portion 392b, and an annular shape coaxial with the second wall portion 392c. A third wall portion 392h erected from the base plate 3392a toward the front side, a spring engaging piece 392k projecting from the base plate 3392a toward the front side, and an inner first locking portion 3392d3. , an inner second locking portion 3392d4, a convex portion 3392f1, and a restricting piece 392f.

The second wall portion 3392c has a diameter larger than that of the first wall portion 392b, and is formed at a predetermined distance from the first wall portion 392b. The second wall portion 3392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of a first displacement member 3396 (displacement unit 3395), which will be described later, and is curved in an arc shape having a diameter along the displacement trajectory of the first displacement member 3396 (displacement unit 3395). formed by

In addition, the second wall portion 3392c has a plurality of cutouts 3392c2 cut out in a slit shape with a predetermined depth (cutout dimension) from the standing tip side toward the base plate 3392a side. In the present embodiment, a pair of cutouts 3392c2 are formed at two locations (four locations in total) in the circumferential direction along the second wall portion 3392c at a predetermined distance in the circumferential direction.

The pair of notch portions 3392c2 are formed by notching from the radially inner side to the radially outer side of the second wall portion 3392c. That is, each notch portion 3392c2 is formed so as to penetrate the second wall portion 3392c in the plate thickness direction (radial direction).

The pair of cutouts 3392c2 are set so that the cutout dimension (depth) toward the base plate 3392a (arrow B direction) is smaller than the standing dimension of the second wall 3392c from the base plate 3392a. That is, each notch 3392c2 does not reach the base end of the second wall portion 3392c, and the base end side of the second wall portion 3392c continues along the circumferential direction (displacement direction of the displacement unit 3395). (formed continuously).

The second wall portion 3392c has an outer first engaging portion extending from the inner peripheral surface of the second wall portion 3392c positioned between the pair of cutout portions 3392c2 toward the radially inner side (displacement unit 3395 side) of the second wall portion 3392c. A stopping portion 3392e3 and a second outer locking portion 3392e4 are provided.

The outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 allow the displacement unit 3395 to be attached to the base member 3392 (base unit 3391) while allowing the displacement unit 3395 to be removed (removed). It is a regulating projection, and projects up to a position overlapping the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 3395 in a front view.

The outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 have their front surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow F) inclined downward toward the rear surface (direction of arrow B) as they move away from the second wall portion 3392c. On the other hand, the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is formed on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base plate 3392a.

The facing distance (dimension in the direction of arrows FB) between the rear surface of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 and the front surface of the base plate 3392a is the displacement unit 3395 (the first displacement member 3396 ) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), or set to be substantially the same or slightly larger. As a result, the displacement unit 3395 can be displaced while sandwiched between the front surface of the base plate 3392a and the rear surfaces of the first outer locking portion 3392e3 and the second outer locking portion 3392e4 (Fig. 41(c)).

The inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are members that restrict the falling off (removal) of the displacement unit 3395 while permitting attachment of the displacement unit 3395 to the base member 3392 (base unit 3391). It is erected from the front surface of the base plate 3392a in the same direction (arrow F direction) as the second wall portion 3392c.

Claw portions protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 toward the second wall portion 3392c. The claw portion (the portion that protrudes toward the second wall portion 3392c from the inner peripheral surface of the upright tip) protrudes to a position that overlaps the displacement locus of the displacement unit 3395 in a front view.

In the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4, the front surface of the claw portion (protruding portion) (surface in the direction of the arrow F) faces the second wall portion 3392c side (protruding portion of the claw portion). The rear surface (the surface in the arrow B direction) is formed on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base plate 3392a.

The facing distance (dimension in the direction of arrows FB) between the rear surface of the claw portion (projecting portion) of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 and the front surface of the base plate 3392a is the displacement unit 3395 It is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of (the engagement portion 396d of the first displacement member 3396). As a result, the displacement unit 3395 (the engaging portion 396d of the first displacement member 3396) is positioned between the front surface of the base plate 3392a and the rear surfaces of the first outer locking portion 3392e3 and the second outer locking portion 3392e4. It can be disposed so as to be displaceable in a sandwiched state (see FIG. 41(c)).

The base member 3392 (base plate 3392a) is made of a resin material and includes an outer first locking portion 3392e3, an outer second locking portion 3392e4, an inner first locking portion 3392d3, and an inner second locking portion. 3392d4 is elastically deformable.

The plate thickness (horizontal direction dimension in FIG. 41(c)) of the erected portion (the portion erected from the base plate 3392a) of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 is equal to the thickness of the base plate 3392a. (dimension in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB)). As a result, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 can be easily elastically deformed in a direction in which the claw portions approach or separate from the displacement unit 3395. As shown in FIG.

The radial plate thickness of the second wall portion 3392c of the inner portion of the pair of notch portions 3392c2 (the portion where the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 are formed) (Fig. 41 ( c) the lateral dimension) may be set smaller than the plate thickness of the base plate 3392a (the dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction)). As a result, the second wall portion 3392c inside the pair of notch portions 3392c2 can be easily elastically deformed in the direction of bringing the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 closer to or away from the displacement unit 3395. .

The convex portion 3392f1 is formed at a position adjacent to the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 3395 arranged at the initial biasing position in a front view, and when the displacement unit 3395 is arranged at the initial biasing position, the second displacement member 397f1 By coming into contact with the displacement member 397 , it functions as a part that defines the arrangement of the second displacement member 397 with respect to the first displacement member 3396 . That is, the convex portion 3392f1 is arranged at the same position as the convex portion 392f1 of the 392f in the first embodiment, and the action (regulation of arrangement) on the second displacement member 397 at the initial urging position is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form (the convex portion 392f1), its detailed description is omitted.

The displacement unit 3395 is urged toward the initial urging position by the coil spring SP2. At the initial urging position, the second displacement member 397 abuts against the projection 3392f, and the displacement unit 3395 is maintained at the initial urging position. (displacement of the displacement unit 3395 beyond the initial biased position is suppressed).

The displacement unit 3395 mainly comprises a first displacement member 3396 and a second displacement member 397 rotatably pivoted on the first displacement member 3396 .

The first displacement member 3396 includes a body portion 396a formed in a shape curved in an arc when viewed from the front (a shape in which an annular shape is divided at two locations (positions with a phase difference of 180 degrees)), and a body portion 396a. A spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C-shape at one end in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction), and a center of the arc of the body portion 396a (inward in the radial direction) at the other end in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the body portion 396a. ), an engaging portion 3396d positioned along the inner edge of the main body portion 396a and formed as a thinner portion than the other portions, and an outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 396a. a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from the outer edge of the main body 396a; and a shaft portion 396h provided.

The thickness of the engaging portion 3396d in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is set to be smaller than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 396a, and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 396a. formed contiguously with the rear surface of the That is, the front surface of the engaging portion 396d (the surface in the direction of arrow F) is positioned backward from the front surface of the main body portion 396a (the side in the direction of arrow B).

When the first displacement member 3396 is arranged on the base member 3392 (base unit 3391), the engaging portion 3392d is formed between the front surface of the base plate 3392a and the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. It is disposed between the claw portion and the rear surface thereof. Therefore, since the thickness of the engaging portion 3396d is smaller (thinner) than the thickness of the main body portion 3396a, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are separated from the base plate 3392a. The standing height can be lowered.

As a result, the rigidity of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement unit 3395 from falling off from the base member 3392 toward the front side (arrow F direction side). In addition, due to the load (impact) when receiving the displacement unit 3395 radially inward (rightward in FIG. 41(c)), the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are damaged (broken). can be suppressed. The radially outward displacement of the displacement unit 3395 can be received by the entire second wall portion 3392c, whereas the radially inward displacement of the displacement unit 3395 can be received by the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner first locking portion 3392d3. Since it is necessary to receive only the second locking portion 3392d4, increasing the rigidity of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 is particularly effective.

Note that the displacement unit 3395 in the third embodiment has recessed portions (inner first recessed portion 396d1, inner second recessed portion d2, outer recessed portion 396e) in the first displacement member 396 as in the first embodiment. ) is not recessed.

The displacement unit 3395 is attached to the base unit 3390 (base unit 3391) by arranging the displacement unit 3395 in front of the base unit 3391 and then pushing the displacement unit 3395 to the rear side (base plate 3392a side).

In this case, the rear surface (the surface formed to be inclined) of the radially outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 is the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 of the base member 3392. The outer first engaging portion 3392e3 and the outer second engaging portion 3392e4 are pushed outward in the radial direction of the second wall portion 3392c, and the second wall portion 3392c (between the pair of cutout portions 3392c2) portion) is elastically deformed radially outward.

Similarly, the radially inner edge (engagement portion 3396d) of the first displacement member 3396 is aligned with the front surfaces ( surface formed at an angle), the claw portions of the inner first engaging portion 3392d3 and the inner second engaging portion 3392d4 are pushed radially inward of the second wall portion 3392c, The standing portions of the engaging portion 3392d3 and the inner second engaging portion 3392d4 are elastically deformed.

After that, the radially outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 is engaged with the claws of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 and the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. , the second wall portion 3392c (the portion between the pair of cutout portions 3392c2) and the standing portions of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 elastically recover, It is returned to the initial position (the position in the unloaded state). This completes the attachment of the displacement unit 3395 to the base unit 3391 .

As described above, according to the base unit 3390, when disposing the displacement unit 3395 on the base unit 3391 as in the first embodiment, it is necessary to align the displacement unit 3395 with a prescribed position (positioning position). Instead, the displacement unit 3395 can be attached (arranged) to the base unit 3391 simply by pushing the displacement unit 3395 from the front side (direction of arrow F) toward the rear side (direction of arrow B) of the displacement area. Moreover, unlike the first embodiment, it is not necessary to slide the displacement unit 3395 (rotate along the displacement trajectory) after pushing it toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the operation (assembling work) when arranging the displacement unit 3395 to the base unit 3391 can be simplified.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the displacement unit 3395 can be arranged from the front side in the displacement locus (the area through which the displacement unit 3395 passes from the initial urging position to the terminal interlocking position). It is not necessary to secure a space for arranging the displacement unit 395 outside the displacement area of the displacement unit 395 as in the embodiment (in the first embodiment, part of the displacement unit 395 protrudes outside the displacement area at the positioning position). Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other parts (for example, the coil spring SP2, the detection device 394, or ribs for reinforcement, etc.).

As described above, each notch portion 3392c2 does not reach the base end of the second wall portion 3392c, and the base end side of the second wall portion 3392c is continuous along the circumferential direction (displacement direction of the displacement unit 3395). (formed continuously).

Therefore, when the displacement unit 3395 (first displacement member 3396) is displaced, the displacement can be received on the base end side of the second wall portion 3392c (the region where the notch portion 3392c2 is not formed). As a result, the portion of the second wall portion 3392c where the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 protrude (the portion located between the pair of notches 3392c2) is damaged (broken). can be suppressed.

In addition, the displacement unit 3395 (first displacement member 3396) can be guided on the base end side of the second wall portion 3392c (the area where the notch portion 3392c2 is not formed) (the inner peripheral surface on the base end side continuous in the circumferential direction can be guided). can be slid), the outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 can be prevented from being caught by the inner edge of the notch 3392c2, resulting in chipping or wear.

Next, a base unit 4390 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the projections formed on the base plate 392a in the recessed portions (inner first recessed portion 396d1, etc.) formed in the radially inner portion and the radially outer portion of the first displacement member 396. Although the case where the displacing unit 395 is arranged in the base unit 391 by inserting the provided portion (the inner first engaging piece 392d1, etc.) has been described, in the fourth embodiment, only one side of the first displacing member 4396 is provided. A case where the recessed portion is formed will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the base unit 4390 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 42(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 4390 taken along line XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 42, the base unit 4390 in the fourth embodiment includes a base unit 4391, a displacement unit 4395 disposed on the base unit 4391, and a coil for biasing the displacement unit 4395 against the base unit 4391. and a spring SP2.

The base unit 4391 includes a base member 4392 arranged inside the rear surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and a leaf spring arranged on the base member 4392. 393 and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 4392 .

The base member 4392 includes a base plate 2392a, a first wall portion 392b erected from the base plate 2392a toward the front side (direction of arrow F) in a semicircular arc shape, and a wall portion 392b extending from the first wall portion 392b. A second wall portion 2392c standing radially outwardly of the first wall portion 392b, a third wall portion 2392h standing frontward from the base plate, and a frontward projecting portion from the base plate 2392a. a spring engaging piece 2392k, an inner first engaging piece 4392d1, and a regulating piece 2392f (see FIG. 40(a)) formed inside the base member 2392 notched in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. , is mainly provided.

The inner first engaging piece 4392d1 is a member that prevents the later-described displacement unit 4395 from coming off (removal), and protrudes at a position along the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 4395. As shown in FIG. The inner first engaging piece 4392d1 projects from the base plate 2392a toward the front side, and the projecting tip is bent toward the second wall portion 2392c.

In addition, the inner first engagement piece 4392d1 has a distance between the bent portion and the base plate 2395a in the longitudinal direction (arrow FB direction) of a displacement unit 4395 (an engagement portion 4396d of the first displacement member 4396) described later. It protrudes longer than the thickness dimension in.

The extension distance T6 toward the second wall portion 2392c at the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4392d1 is longer than the distance T7 between the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4392d1 and the base plate 2392a. It is set small (T7>T6).

The second wall portion 4392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 4395, which will be described later.

In addition, the second wall portion 4392c has a plurality of notch portions 4392c2 formed by notching the base plate 2392a side from the standing tip side thereof. In this embodiment, a pair of cutouts 4392c2 separated by a predetermined distance along the extending direction of the second wall portion 4392c are formed at two locations (four locations in total) in the extending direction.

The pair of cutouts 4392c2 are cut out in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second wall 4392c. In addition, the cutout dimension toward the base plate 2392a (arrow B direction side) of the pair of notch portions 4392c2 is set smaller than the standing dimension of the second wall portion 4392c from the base plate 2392a. That is, the second wall portion 4392c is in a state in which the proximal end side (the side of the base plate 2392a) is continuous.

In addition, the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e3 protrude toward the displacement unit 4395 side from the displacement unit 4395 side surface of the second wall portion 4392c positioned between the pair of notch portions 4392c2. A portion 4392e4 is formed.

The outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 allow the displacement unit 4395 to be attached to the base member 4392 (base unit 4391), and prevent the displacement unit 4395 from falling off (removing). It is a regulating protrusion, and protrudes at a position along the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 4395 .

The front side (arrow F direction side) of the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer side second locking portion 4392e4 incline toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) as the distance from the second wall portion 4392c increases. formed by On the other hand, the outer first engaging portion 4392e3 and the outer second engaging portion 4392e4 are formed such that the rear surface side thereof is a plane parallel to the front surface of the base plate 4392a.

Furthermore, the rear surfaces of the first outer locking portion 4392e3 and the second outer locking portion 4392e4 are formed at positions spaced apart from each other by a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the displacement unit 4395 (first displacement member 4396). As a result, the displacement unit 4395 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 4392a is sandwiched between the base plate 4392a, the outer first locking portion 4392e3, and the outer second locking portion 4392e4. (See FIG. 42(b)).

In addition, the plate thickness of the second wall portion 4392c of the inner portion of the pair of notch portions 4392c2 (the portion where the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 are formed) is equal to the plate thickness of the base plate 2392a. It is formed smaller than the thickness (thickness of the base plate 2392a in the front-rear direction). This makes it easier to elastically deform the second wall portion 4392c inside the pair of notch portions 4392c2 in the radial direction.

The displacement unit 4395 mainly includes a first displacement member 4396 formed linearly as a whole when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 397 pivotally supported by the first displacement member 4396 .

The first displacement member 4396 includes a main body portion 2396a formed in a straight line, a spring engagement portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape at one end of the main body portion 2396a extending in a straight line, and a spring engaging portion 396c formed in a straight line. A projecting portion 396b projecting toward the center of the first wall portion 392b of the base plate 2392a on the other end side of the extended body portion 2396a, and a second wall portion 2392c formed along the displacement unit 4395. an engaging portion 4396d protruding from the side surface opposite to , a detection piece 396f protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 2396a on the second wall portion 2392c side, and a columnar protrusion protruding from the rear surface of the main body portion 2396a. and a shaft portion 396h.

The engaging portion 4396d has a shape obtained by omitting the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 from the engaging portion 2396d in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The method of attaching the displacement unit 3395 to the base unit 4391 of the base unit 4390 configured as described above is as follows. 2392a, the engaging portion 4396d is pushed into the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4391d1.

In addition, as described above, the inner first engaging piece 4391d1 has an extending distance T6 (see FIG. 42(b)) toward the second wall portion 2392c at the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4392d1. Since it is set smaller (shorter) than the distance T7 (see FIG. 42(b)) between the bent portion of the first engaging piece 4392d1 and the base plate 4391a, the engaging portion 4396d is obliquely arranged. After pushing it into the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4391d1 in this state, the displacement unit 4395 can be rotated toward the base plate 4392a around the engaging portion 4396d.

Next, the displacement unit 4395, which is obliquely arranged with respect to the front surface of the base plate 2392a, is rotated toward the side of the base plate 4392a around the engagement portion 4396d side, and the displacement unit 4395 is rotated to the side opposite to the engagement portion 4396d. toward the base plate 4392a.

As a result, the edge of the first displacement member 4396 opposite to the engaging portion 4396d comes into contact with the first outer locking portion 4392e3 and the second outer locking portion 4392e4, and the first outer locking portion 4392e3 is engaged. , and pushes the outer second locking portion 4392e4 toward the second wall portion 3392c to elastically deform the second wall portion 3392c.

As a result, a space for displacing the side of the displacement unit 4395 opposite to the engaging portion 4396d toward the base plate 4392a can be secured, and the displacement unit 4395 can be attached to the base unit 3391 .

Further, as described above, the thickness of the body portion 4396a in the front-rear direction is set to be smaller than the distance from the outer first engaging portion 4392e3 and the outer second engaging portion 4392e4 to the front surface of the base plate 2392a.

Therefore, when the displacement unit 4395 is pushed to the front of the base plate 2392a, the outer first locking portion 3392e3, the outer second locking portion 3392e4, and the first displacement member 4396 are released from contact, and the outer first locking portion 4396 is released. The elastic deformation of the stop portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 is restored (released).

According to the base unit 4390 configured as described above, one side of the displacement unit 4395 (engagement portion 4396d side) is engaged with the inside of the bent portion of the inner first engagement piece 4391d1, and the engagement side is By pushing the other side of the displacement unit 4395 toward the base plate 4392a as a fulcrum, the displacement unit 4395 can be arranged on the base unit 4391 .

Therefore, when disposing the displacement unit 3395 on the base unit 4391 as in the third embodiment, the outer first locking portion 3392e3, the outer second locking portion 3392e4, and the inner side are formed on both sides of the displacement unit 3395. It is not necessary to elastically displace the first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. That is, it is not necessary to push in while uniformly elastically deforming the locking portions 3392e3, 33992d3, etc. on both sides of the displacement unit 3395. FIG. Therefore, disposition of the displacement unit 4395 to the base unit 4391 can be simplified.

In addition, since there is no need to elastically deform the inner first engaging piece 4391d, the rigidity of the inner first engaging piece 4391d is relatively high (compared to the inner first locking portion 4391d3 of the third embodiment). Thus, deformation of the inner first engagement piece 4391d when the displacement unit 4395 is displaced can be suppressed.

In particular, by adopting a configuration that does not elastically deform the inner first engaging piece 4391d, it is possible not only to improve the holding performance (performance to prevent falling off) of the displacement unit 4395, but also to use an illegal member (for example, a wire or (Piano wire) can be used to easily suppress unauthorized removal of the displacement unit 4395 . In this case, the arrangement position of the inner first engaging piece 4391d is brought closer to the side where the unauthorized member is inserted than the arrangement positions of the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4. is preferred.

Next, a base unit 5390 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. In the first embodiment, the operation unit 320 is operated by the player to displace the displacement unit 395. However, in the base unit 5390 of the fifth embodiment, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced by the driving device 5398. Displacement of the displacement unit 5395 displaces the operation unit 320 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the base unit 5390 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a front view of the base unit 5391 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 43(b) is a schematic sectional view of the base unit 5391 along line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43(a). 44(a) is a front view of the displacement unit 5395, FIG. 44(b) is a rear view of the displacement unit 5395, and FIG. 44(c) is a displacement of XLIVc-XLIVc in FIG. 44(a). 5395 is a cross-sectional view of unit 5395. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the base unit 5390 in the fifth embodiment includes a base unit 5391, a displacement unit 5395 arranged on the base unit 5391, and the displacement unit 5395 attached to the base unit 5391. It mainly includes a coil spring SP2 (see FIG. 45(a)) for biasing, and a driving device 5398 (see FIG. 46(a)) disposed on the rear side of the base unit 5391. FIG.

The base unit 5391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral edge shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300 described above, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 5392 that is mounted on the base member 5392 , a leaf spring 393 that is arranged on the base member 5392 , and a detection device 394 that is arranged on the base member 392 .

The base member 5392 includes a base plate 5392a, a first wall portion 392b that is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 5392a, and that is erected toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 5392a. The third wall portion is formed in a semicircular shape coaxially with the center of the first wall portion 392b, is formed in an annular shape coaxially with the first wall portion 392b, and stands upright from the base plate 392a toward the front side. 392h, a spring engaging piece 392k projecting from the base plate 5392a toward the front side, and a convex portion 3392f1, located radially outside of the first wall portion 5392b and formed in a long hole through the base plate 5392a. and a sliding groove 5392a2.

The insertion hole 5392a1 is a hole through which the shaft of the driving device 5398 (see FIG. 46(a)) disposed on the rear side of the base unit 5391 is inserted, and is formed at a position corresponding to the driving device 5398. The driving device 5398 has a pinion 5398a attached to a shaft inserted through the insertion hole 5392a1, and the pinion 5398a is meshed with a tooth portion 5396k of a displacement unit 5395 described later, thereby driving the driving device 5398 and displacing the displacement unit. 5395 can be displaced.

The slide groove 5392a2 is a groove that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 5395, which will be described later, and a roller 5396j of the displacement unit 5395 is inserted. Also, the sliding groove 5392a2 is formed in an arcuate shape coaxial with the first wall portion 392b.

The displacement unit 5395 mainly includes a first displacement member 5396 formed in a generally semicircular arc shape in front view, and a second displacement member 397 pivotally supported by the first displacement member 5396 .

The first displacement member 5396 includes a main body portion 396a formed in an arc shape, a spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape in a front view at one end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape, and a circular A projecting portion 5396b projecting toward the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a is provided on the other end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc, and a plurality of protruding portions 5396b are arranged along the edge of the outer peripheral side of the main body portion 396a. a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from the edge of the outer peripheral side of the main body 396a; Mainly provide

Further, on the first surface 396a1 of the main body portion 396a, there are provided a rotating shaft portion 5396i that projects in a cylindrical shape toward the rear side from two different positions in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft portion 5396i that is rotatable around the rotating shaft portion 5396i. and a hook portion 5396m protruding in a hook shape toward the rear side from two locations in the circumferential direction different from the rotating shaft portion 5396i.

The rotating shaft portion 5396i is a shaft that holds the roller 5396j, and is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the roller 5396j and a longer axial length than the roller 5396j. Further, the rotating shaft portion 5396i is formed with a hole into which a screw is screwed in the center. Thus, after the roller 5396j is arranged around the rotation shaft portion 5396i, the roller 5396j is rotatably arranged on the rotation shaft portion 5396i by screwing the screw onto the rotation shaft portion 5396i.

The roller 5396j is a portion disposed inside the slide groove 5392a2 of the base plate 5392a as described above, and its outer diameter is set smaller than the width dimension of the slide groove 5392a2. In addition, each roller 5396j disposed on the two rotation shaft portions 5396i has an angle θ1 (see FIG. 44(b)) spaced apart in the circumferential direction around the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a. It is set smaller than the angle θ2 (see FIG. 43(a)) extending in the circumferential direction around the center of the arc of 5392a2. As a result, the two rollers 5396j can be displaced along the sliding groove 5392a2, and the displacement unit 5395 can be rotationally displaced by the difference between the angles θ1 and θ2.

The projecting portion 5396b is formed on the displacement trajectory of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15). In addition, an engagement hole 5396b1 is formed in the projecting portion 5396b so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engagement hole 5396b1 is a hole into which the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is inserted. It is formed at a position corresponding to 342b (see FIG. 16(b)). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the operation unit 320 and the base unit 5390 are assembled, the engaging piece 342b is inserted into the engaging hole 5396b1.

In addition, the size of the engagement hole 5396b1 in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a is set substantially equal to the size of the engagement piece 342b in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a. Thereby, the displacement unit 5395 and the operation unit 320 can always be interlocked.

A plurality of (11 in this embodiment) rows of tooth portions 5396k are arranged along the radially outer edge of the main body portion 396a from the other end of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape toward the one end side. is set. The tooth portion 5396k is a portion that meshes with a pinion 5398a arranged on the shaft of the drive device 5398 arranged on the base unit 5391 . Accordingly, when the driving device 5398 rotates the pinion 5398a, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced.

The two hook portions 5396m project from the main body portion 396a with their tips bent in a substantially L shape. The two hook portions 5396m are formed between two rotating shaft portions 5396i arranged at different positions in the circumferential direction around the center of the arc of the body portion 396a. They protrude at different positions in the radial direction.

Further, the two hook portions 5396m are bent in opposite directions in the radial direction from the center of the arc of the body portion 396a, and one of the hook portions 5396m bent radially inward is the above-described slide. The other hook portion 5396m, which protrudes from a position along the inner diameter side edge of the moving groove 5392a2 and bends outward in the radial direction, protrudes at a position along the outer diameter side edge of the sliding groove 5392a2. (See FIG. 46(e)).

Further, the hook portion 5396m is a member that engages with the base plate 5392a to prevent the displacement unit 5395 from falling off to the front side, and the bent portion at the tip of the hook portion 5396m is a base around the sliding groove 5392a2. It is set at a position overlapping the plate 5392a in the front-rear direction, and the distance between the facing surfaces from the bent portion to the first surface 396a1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 5392a.

Further, the hook portion 5396m is formed so that the projecting tip surface is inclined to the front side toward the bent tip side. As a result, when disposing the displacement unit 5395 in the base unit 5391, the hook portion 5396m whose bent portion at the tip overlaps with the base plate 5392a around the sliding groove 5392a2 in the front-rear direction is replaced by the projecting tip surface of the hook portion 5396m. can be elastically deformed to the inside of the slide groove 5392a2 by utilizing the inclination of the groove 5392a2. In addition, by arranging the bent portion of the hook portion 5396m beyond the rear surface of the base plate 5392a, the elastic deformation of the hook portion 5396m is restored and the bent portion at the tip of the hook portion 5396m is moved to the base around the sliding groove 5392a2. It can be arranged at a position overlapping the plate 5392a in the front-rear direction. That is, the hook portion 5396m allows the displacing unit 5935 to be arranged on the base unit 5391 and can prevent the displacing unit 5935 from falling off from the base unit 5391 .

In addition, the two hook portions 5396m are set so that the distance between them in the radial direction on the side of the body portion 396a (base end side) in the facing direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the roller 5396j described above. Accordingly, when the displacement unit 5395 is displaced with respect to the base plate 5392a, it is possible to prevent the hook portion 5396m arranged inside the sliding groove 5392a2 from rubbing against the inner surface of the sliding groove 5392a2 and being damaged.

According to the base unit 5390 configured as described above, the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) configured as a rack is arranged on the base unit 5391 only by engaging the hook 5396m with the sliding groove 5392a2. is set. That is, there is no need for an operation (for example, an operation for tightening a screw) after disposing the displacement unit 5395 on the base unit 5391 . Therefore, the work of the worker who assembles the base unit 5390 can be simplified.

Further, the sliding groove 5392a2 can be provided (combined) with a role of a guide portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 5395 and a role of an engaged portion that engages the hook portion 5396m. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to separately form the guide portion for guiding the displacement unit 5395 and the engaged portion for engaging the hook portion 5396m on the base plate 5392a. Space can be easily secured.

Further, as in the case of the first embodiment, the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the outer first engaging piece 392e1 are provided on the base plate 392a, and the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the outer first engaging piece 392e1 are provided. is engaged with the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396), the inner first engagement piece 392d1 or the outer first engagement piece 392d1 or the outer first engagement piece A tooth portion 5396k cannot be provided in a portion facing (interfering with) 392e1.

On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment, the hook portion 5396m is projected from the back side of the first displacement member 5396, and the hook portion 5396m is engaged with the sliding groove 5392a2. It is possible to easily secure a region where the tooth portion 5396k can be arranged on the outer edge of the .

Next, displacement of the displacement unit 5395 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c) are front views of the base unit 5390, and FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c) are views of the base unit 5390 taken along line XLVIa-XLVIa of FIG. 45(a). 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 5390 along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(a). FIG. 46(e) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 5390 along line XLVIe-XLVIe in FIG. 46(a).

45(a) to 45(c) and FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c), the outer shape of the engaging piece 342b (see FIG. 16(b)) of the operation unit 320 is illustrated with a dashed line. be. 45(a) and 46(a) show the base unit 5390 in the initial urging position, and FIGS. 45(c) and 46(c) show the terminal interlocking position. 45(b) and 46(b), the base unit 5390 is shown in a position intermediate between the initial bias position and the terminal interlock position. be done.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the displacement unit 5395 is driven by a pinion 5398a rotated by a driving device 5398 through teeth 5396k. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the pinion 5398a is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced from the initial urging position to the end interlocking position side. On the other hand, when the pinion 5398a is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced from the end interlocking position to the initial biasing position.

At the initial urging position, the roller 5396j arranged on one end side of the main body portion 396a out of the two rollers 5396j is arranged at a position adjacent to the end portion of the sliding groove 5392a2 on the one end side in the circumferential direction. . At the interlock end position, the roller 5396j arranged on the other end side of the main body portion 396a out of the two rollers 5396j is arranged at a position adjacent to the end portion of the slide groove 5392a2 on the other end side in the circumferential direction. be. As a result, displacement of the displacement unit 5395 beyond the initial urging position or the terminal interlocking position can be suppressed.

Also, the rotation angle of the displacement unit 5395 from the initial urging position to the terminal interlocking position is set to be the same as the rotation angle of the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the terminal position. As described above, the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position is inserted into the engagement hole 5396b1 of the displacement unit 5395 arranged at the initial urging position, so that the displacement unit 5395 reaches the end interlocking position. When rotated, the operating unit 320 is rotated to the end position.

Next, a base unit 6390 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the side of the regulation piece 392f connected to the base plate 392a is set in the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2. The side of the piece 6392f connected to the base plate 6392a is set in the direction opposite to the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is biased by the coil spring SP2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

47(a) is a front view of the base unit 6391 in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 47(b) is a front view of the base unit 6390, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of FIG. 47(b). FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 6390 taken along line XLVIIc-XLVIIc.

As shown in FIG. 47, the base unit 6390 in the sixth embodiment includes a base unit 6391, a displacement unit 395 disposed on the base unit 6391, and a coil for biasing the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. and a spring SP2.

The base unit 6391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral edge shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. It mainly comprises a base member 392 , a leaf spring 393 arranged on the base member 6392 , and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 392 .

The base member 6392 includes a base plate 6392a, a first wall portion 392b that is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 6392a, and that is erected toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. A second wall portion 392c, which is formed in a semicircular shape coaxially with the center of the first wall portion 392b and erected from the base plate 392a toward the front side, the first wall portion 392b, and the second wall portion 392c. A third wall portion 392h formed in an annular shape coaxially with the base plate 392a and erected toward the front side, a spring engagement piece 392k projecting toward the front side from the base plate 392a, It mainly includes an inner first engaging piece 392d1, an inner second engaging piece 392d2, and a restricting piece 6392f formed inside the base plate 392a notched in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

The restricting piece 6392f is a member that restricts displacement to one side of the displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and is formed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c when viewed from the front. Also, the restricting piece 6392f is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 arranged between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

The restricting piece 6392f is formed by cutting the base plate 6392a in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and one end connected to the base plate 6392a is aligned with the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2. set in the opposite direction. In addition, the restricting piece 6392f has a convex portion 392f1 protruding toward the front side (displacement unit 395 side) at the other end, and the convex portion 392f1 is brought into contact with the displacement unit 395 to can regulate the displacement to

According to the restricting piece 6392f of the sixth embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the end interlocking position side to the initial urging position side, the second displacement member 397 is brought into contact with the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 6392f. to maintain the displacement unit 395 in the initial biased position.

One end of the regulating piece 6392f connected to the base plate 6392a is set in the direction opposite to the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2. The force when contacting the piece 6392f can act as a force in the direction of pulling the restricting piece 6392f in its extending direction.

Therefore, like the restricting piece 392f in the first embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 abuts, the restricting piece 6392f is elastically deformed into a bent posture with its base side (connected portion with the base plate 392a) as a fulcrum. can be suppressed. That is, the load on the base side of the restricting piece 6392f can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 6392f is in contact with the second displacement member 397 and the displacement unit 395 is maintained at the initial urging position, the base plate 392a There is a possibility that the restricting piece 392f may take a bent posture with the fulcrum of the connecting portion). If such a habit is formed, the relative position of the restricting piece 392f (convex portion 392f1) with respect to the second displacement member 397 changes, and the second displacing member 397 cannot contact the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 6392f. Alternatively, the contact causes the base portion of the restricting piece 6392f to bend more. On the other hand, as in the sixth embodiment, by being pulled and deformed, the initial posture of the regulation piece 392f can be maintained.

When disposing the displacement unit 395 on the base unit 6391, the displacement unit 395 is disposed on the base unit 6391 by elastically deforming the regulation piece 6392f toward the rear side in the same manner as the regulation piece 392f in the first embodiment. can. In this case, the position of the convex portion 392f1 with respect to the second displacement member 397 is the same as in the first embodiment. The second displacement member 397 can be prevented from coming off (from the shaft portion 396h) by using the portion 3921f1 (bringing it into contact).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a base unit 7390 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the second side wall 397f of the second displacement member 397 is formed on a flat surface has been described. recessed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 48 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a base unit 7390 in the seventh embodiment. 48 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the base unit 390 in FIG. 33(a).

As shown in FIG. 48, the base unit 7390 in the seventh embodiment includes a base unit 391, a displacement unit 7395 disposed on the base unit 7391, and a coil for biasing the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. and a spring SP2.

The base unit 7391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral edge shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is arranged inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 7392 , a leaf spring 393 arranged on the base member 7392 , and a detection device 394 arranged on the base member 392 .

The base member 7392 includes a base plate 392a, a first wall portion 392b which is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 392a, and which is erected toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. A second wall portion 392c, which is formed in a semicircular shape coaxially with the center of the first wall portion 392b and erected from the base plate 392a toward the front side, the first wall portion 392b, and the second wall portion 392c. A third wall portion 392h formed in an annular shape coaxially with the base plate 392a and erected toward the front side, a spring engagement piece 392k projecting toward the front side from the base plate 392a, It mainly includes an inner first engaging piece 392d1, an inner second engaging piece 392d2, and a restricting piece 7392f formed on the inner side of the base plate 392a notched in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

The restricting piece 7392f is a member that restricts displacement to one side of the displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and is formed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c when viewed from the front. Also, the restricting piece 7392f is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 disposed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

The restricting piece 7392f is formed by cutting the base plate 392a in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and one end thereof is connected to the base plate 392a. In addition, the restricting piece 7392f has a convex portion 7392f1 protruding toward the front side (displacement unit 7395 side) at the other end, and the convex portion 7392f1 is brought into contact with the displacement unit 7395 to can regulate the displacement to

Further, the convex portion 7392f1 includes a second convex portion 7392f2 having a triangular cross-section and having a contact surface with the displacement unit 7395 that protrudes toward the contact surface (second side wall 7397f) of the displacement unit 7395 . The second convex portion 7392f2 has a triangular cross section formed along the plane of the base plate 7392a over the entire contact surface of the convex portion 7391f with the displacement unit 7395 .

The displacement unit 7395 mainly includes a first displacement member 396 having a generally semicircular arc shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 7397 pivotally supported by the first displacement member 396 .

The first displacement member 396 includes a main body portion 396a formed in an arc shape, a spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape in a front view at one end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape, and a circular A protruding portion 396b protruding toward the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a on the other end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc, and an engaging portion 396d protruding along the inner edge of the main body portion 396a. an outer recessed portion 396e formed by notching the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 396a; a detection piece 396f protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 396a; A shaft portion 396h that protrudes in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the main body portion 396a is mainly provided.

As with the second displacement member 397 in the first embodiment, the second displacement member 7397 is generally triangular in shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the second displacement member 7397 has a pivot hole 397a penetrating in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the second displacement member 7397 has a first corner portion 397b, a second corner portion 397c, and a third corner portion 397d at the tip portions of each of the three points, similarly to the second displacement member 397 in the first embodiment. will be described with reference numerals.

A second side wall 7397f of the side wall connecting the first corner portion 397b and the third corner portion 397d is brought into contact with the restricting piece 7392f of the base plate 7392a when the displacement unit 7395 is arranged at the initial biasing position. The cross-sectional shape of the side surface is a triangular concave portion 7397f1 that corresponds to the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 7392f2 of the restricting piece 7392f.

As a result, when the displacement unit 7395 is placed at the initial biasing position and the coil spring SP2 biases the displacement unit 7395 toward the regulation piece 7392f, the second protrusion 7392f2 is inserted inside the recess 7397f1, The restricting piece 7392f and the second displacement member 7397 can be engaged. Therefore, in the state where the displacement unit 7395 is arranged at the initial urging position, the restricting piece 7392f is elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) using an improper member (for example, wire or piano wire). , the restriction of the displacement unit 7395 by the restriction piece 7392f can be suppressed from being illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacing unit 7395 from being displaced to the positioning position and illegally removing the displacing unit 7395 from the base plate 392a.

Further, since the regulation piece 7392f and the second displacement member 7397 are engaged with each other, the displacement unit 7395 is maintained at the initial biased position by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2, and the base side (base plate 392a and (connecting portion)) to prevent the restricting piece 7392f from being in a bent posture.

Next, an operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 is formed in a perfectly circular ring is described, but in the operation unit 8320 of the eighth embodiment, the guided member 8345 is formed in an elliptical ring. . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 49, the overall configuration of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350 in the eighth embodiment will be described. 49(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 49(b) is a sectional view of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350. FIG. 49(b) corresponds to the sectional view of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG. 22(d).

As shown in FIG. 49, the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment includes a gripping unit 330 arranged on the front side and a rotating unit 8340 connected to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330. , provided.

The rotation unit 8340 is arranged on the gripping unit 330 side and includes a front side member 341 connected to the gripping unit 330, a rear side member 342 arranged on the rear side of the front side member 341, and a rear side member 342 arranged on the rear side of the front side member 341. a cylindrical shaft member 343 protruding radially outwardly from 342, an annular guided member 344 disposed surrounding the shaft member 343, and a guided member 8345; Mainly provide

In the eighth embodiment, the guided member 344 is disposed on one side of the shaft member 343 protruding from two locations facing each other radially outward from the rear side member 342, and the other side of the shaft member 343 is provided. A guided member 8345 is arranged in the .

The guided member 8345 has an elliptical outer shape and a perfect circular inner shape. Further, the guided member 8345 is arranged in a state of being fastened and fixed to the shaft member 343 and is arranged in a state of being unable to rotate about the axis with respect to the shaft member 343 . Further, the guided member 8345 is disposed inside the guide groove 8351 among the guide grooves 351 and 8351 formed in the guide unit 8350 which will be described later. A guided member 344 is arranged inside the guide groove 351 .

The guide unit 8350 includes a front guide unit 360 that is arranged on the front side of the rotation unit 340 and restricts the displacement of the rotation unit 340 to the front side, and a guide unit 8350 that is arranged on the rear side of the rotation unit 340 and is positioned on the rear side of the rotation unit 340. and a back side guide unit 370 that regulates displacement to the back side.

In addition, the guide unit 8350 has a recessed portion formed by the connecting surface of the recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 of the rear side guide unit 370. A guide groove 351 and a guide groove 8352 that partially surround the installation portion 362a2 are formed. In addition, the guide groove 351 and the guide groove 8352 are formed at positions opposite to the guide unit 8350, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), the guide groove 8352 extends in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370. The portion is formed in a shape that slopes toward the back side.

Further, the guide groove 8352 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b, which serve as guide surfaces (wall surfaces for restricting the movement of the guided member 8344) of the guided member 8344 on the second annular member 362 side. , a third guide surface 8351c and a fourth guide surface 8351d serving as guide surfaces for the guided member 8344 on the back side guide unit 370, the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360, and the back side guide It mainly includes a first end portion 351 e and a second end portion 351 f that serve as circumferential ends of the first portion 371 of the unit 370 .

The first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are formed facing each other. In addition, the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are set such that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the outer dimension of the guided member 8344 in the lateral direction. As a result, the guided member 8344 can be moved while its moving direction is restricted by the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c. In the following description, the movement area of the guided member 344 formed between the opposing first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c will be referred to as a "first guide area".

Also, the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are formed as wall surfaces extending in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 and inclined in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guided member 8344 that moves in the first guiding region moves in the front-rear direction of the guide unit 350 while moving in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 . Therefore, the operation unit 320 is displaced to move in the axial direction of the erected wall 341b while rotating about the center of the erected wall 341b of the rotary unit 340. As shown in FIG.

When force is not input to the operation unit 320 from the outside of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the player does not operate), the rotation unit 340 is moved toward the front side by the coil spring SP1 described above. By being biased, the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide surface 351a to the first end portion 351e. As a result, at the initial position, the guided member 344 is maintained in contact with the first end 351e.

The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are formed facing each other. The second guide surface 351b extends in a direction parallel to the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the fourth guide surface 8351d is formed as a guide surface that faces the front side as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 .

The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are connected to the ends of the first guide area (the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c) on the back side (arrow B direction side). . As a result, the guided member 8344 that has moved the first guide area to the back side (the direction of the arrow B) can be received between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d.

Also, the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are formed to face each other. In addition, the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are set so that the minimum distance between them is larger than the outside dimension of the guided member 8344 in the lateral direction. As a result, the guided member 8344 can be moved while its movement direction is restricted by the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d. In the following description, the movement area of the guided member 8344 formed between the opposing second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d will be referred to as a "second guide area".

The second guide surface 351b extends in a direction parallel to the horizontal direction, and the fourth guide surface 8351d is the first guide surface in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. It is formed as a guide surface that faces the front side as it approaches the connecting portion with the surface 351a. Therefore, when the guided member 8344 moves on the second guide surface 351b side (front side) of the second guiding region, the guided member 8344 moves along the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 in the circumferential direction. , the guided member 8344 is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) with respect to the guide unit 350 by the inclination of the second guide surface in the front-rear direction.

Further, when the guided member 8344 moves on the fourth guide surface 8351d side (rear side) of the second guiding region, the guided member 8344 moves along the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 in the circumferential direction. is moved to In this case, since the fourth guide surface 8351d extends parallel to the horizontal direction, the guided member 8344 is not displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) with respect to the guide unit 350. be.

Further, a connecting portion between the third guide surface 8351c and the fourth guide surface 8351d is provided with a housing portion 8351m recessed toward the back side guide unit 370 along the guide surface of the third guide surface 8351c. The accommodating portion 8351m is a region for receiving the member to be guided 8344 guided in the first guiding region and rotating the member to be guided 8344 to enter the member to be guided 8344 into the second guiding region. The displacement of the guided member 8344 from the first guiding area to the second guiding area will be described later.

Next, operation of the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. FIG. FIGS. 50(a), 51(a), 52(a) and 53(a) are front views of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350, and FIGS. 50(b) and 51(b). ), FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b) are side views of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350, and FIGS. 50(c), 51(c), 52(c) and 53 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of an operation unit 8320 and a guide unit 8350. FIG.

50 to 53 show transition states of the operation unit 8320 with respect to the guide unit 8350 in order, and FIGS. 51(a) to 51(c) show the state in which the operation unit 8320 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 53(a) to 53(b) illustrate a state in which the operation unit 8320 is arranged in the terminal position. .

As shown in FIG. 50, when the operation unit 8320 is arranged at the initial position, the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 331b of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 of the operation unit 8320 are horizontal. placed parallel to the Further, the guided member 8344 arranged inside the guide groove 8351 is arranged on the first end portion 351e side of the first guide area.

Next, the operation unit 8320 is operated by the player so that the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 are rotated clockwise in front view, or the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the grasping unit 330 is pushed to the back side (arrow B direction side), the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 that is fastened to the grasping unit 330 moves in the first guide region of the guide groove 351. do.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 51, the grasping unit 330 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Further, the guided member 8344 disposed inside the guide groove 8351 slides in the first guide area and is arranged in the connecting portion (inside the accommodating portion 8351m) between the first guide area and the second guide area. be done.

Third, when the operation unit 8320 is operated by the player to displace the gripping unit 330 in the extending direction of the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the gripping unit 330, the gripping unit 8320 is displaced. As the unit 330 is displaced, the guided member 8344 is rotated inside the guide groove 7244 so that the longitudinal direction of the guided member 8344 is parallel to the extension direction of the second guide region. This allows the guided member 8344 to slide in the second guiding region.

Further, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 of the operation unit 8320 is set upward. As a result, when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 8320 halfway through, the load of the grip unit 330 is used to move the operation unit 8320 to the first position (FIGS. 41(a) to 41(c)). position).

Finally, when the operation unit 8320 is further operated by the player to rotate the grasping unit 330 clockwise in front view, the guided member 8334 of the rotating unit 8340 which is fastened to the grasping unit 330 is pushed into the guide groove 351. It moves in the second guide area and is arranged at a position where it abuts on the second end 351f.

In the second guide area, unlike the first guide area, the guide surface on the back side of the guide groove 351 in which the guided member 344 is guided extends parallel to the horizontal direction. When the guide unit side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) is pushed, the guided member 344 does not move in the second guide area, and the guided member 344 stays at the connecting portion with the first guide area. state.

According to the operation unit 8320 of the eighth embodiment that is displaced as described above, the operation when the member to be guided 8344 moves in the first guiding area and the operation when the member to be guided 8344 moves in the second guiding area are performed. Between the operations, an operation is required when the guided member 8344 is allowed to move in the second guiding area. This can prevent the operation unit 8320 from being inadvertently displaced to the end position.

Next, an operation unit 320 and a guide unit 9350 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 moves between the first guiding area and the second guiding area has been described. In the ninth embodiment, the guided member 344 moves between the first guiding area and the second guiding area. and 3 guide areas. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

54(a) to 54(c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 9350 in the ninth embodiment. 54(a) to 54(c) correspond to cross sections of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 9350 in FIG. 22(d).

As shown in FIG. 54, the guide grooves 9351 formed in the guide unit 9350 in the ninth embodiment are formed on the second annular member 362 of the front-side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back-side guide unit 370. A portion extending in the circumferential direction, a portion extending in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the front side guide unit 360 and the rear side guide unit 370, and a portion extending in the circumferential direction and the front side and a portion formed in a shape sloping toward.

Further, the guide groove 9351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b, which serve as guide surfaces (wall surfaces for restricting movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side. , a third guide surface 351c and a fourth guide surface 351d serving as guide surfaces for the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370, a second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360, and a back side guide From the connecting portion of the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f, the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d, which are the ends in the circumferential direction of the first portion 371 of the unit 370, to the back side and a rear-side recessed portion 9351k that is recessed toward.

The rear side recessed portion 9351k is formed with a groove width larger than the outer shape of the guided member 344 and extends toward the rear side. Further, the rear-side concave portion 9351k allows the guided member 344 to move in its extending direction, and the moving region thereof will be referred to as a "third guiding region" for explanation. The third guide area is formed so as to be continuous with the connecting portion between the first guide area and the second guide area, and is capable of receiving the guided member 344 that moves in the first guide area or the second guide area. be.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 54(b), when the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the grasping unit 330 is pushed toward the back side (arrow B direction side), the rotating unit 340 is engaged with the grasping unit 330. , the guided member 334 moves in the first guiding region of the guiding groove 351 . In this case, the guided member 344 is guided along the third guide surface 351c on the back side, and is inserted inside the back side recessed portion 9351k at the connecting portion between the first guide area and the third guide area. be. Thereby, the guided member 344 that moves in the first guiding area can be moved to the third guiding area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the operation unit 320 is operated by the player, and the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 are rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. When rotated, the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 coupled with the gripping unit 330 moves in the first guiding region of the guiding groove 351 . In this case, the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide surface 351a on the front side and is guided between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d. As a result, the guided member 344 that moves in the first guiding area can be moved to the second guiding area.

According to the guide unit 9350 configured as described above, the displacement of the operation unit 320 can be changed by changing the operation direction of the operation unit 320 (selection of push operation or rotation operation). As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of operation patterns to easily give interest to the player.

A sensor device for detecting the displacement position of the operation unit 320 is provided to determine whether the operation unit 320 has been displaced to the second guide area (rotation operation) or to the third guide area (push operation). ), may be configured to detect at least.

Specifically, a detection target (detection piece) is formed in the operation unit 320, and a sensor device that detects the detection target (for example, an irradiation unit that emits light and a sensor capable of receiving light emitted from the irradiation unit) is used. and a light-receiving part arranged opposite to, and the displacement position of the operation unit 320 is detected based on the fact that the detected part of the operation unit 320 is arranged between them and the light is blocked), In two places, on the displacement trajectory of the detected part when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the second guide area and on the displacement trajectory of the detected part when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the third guide area. A configuration in which each is arranged is exemplified.

As a result, even with one operation unit 320, two types of inputs can be formed by changing the operation direction of the operation unit 320 (selection of push operation or rotation operation). Therefore, it is unnecessary to provide the same number of operators (operation units 320) as the types of inputs (two in this embodiment), and the cost of parts can be reduced. In addition, since a plurality of inputs (two types in this embodiment) can be formed by one operator (operation unit 320), the operability of the player can be improved (that is, it is unnecessary to release the grip unit 330). ), and it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

Next, the operation unit 10320 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the gripping unit 330 and the rotating unit 340 are interlocked has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the interlocking between the gripping unit 10330 and the rotating unit 340 can be released. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the operation unit 10320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55(a) is a side view of the operation unit 10320 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10320 along line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55(a). 56 is an exploded perspective view of gripping unit 10330. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the operation unit 10320 in the tenth embodiment includes a gripping unit 10330 arranged on the front side, and a rotation gripping unit 10330 connected to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 10330. As shown in FIGS. a unit 340;

The grasping unit 10330 is positioned on the front side and is composed of an operation element 10335 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and a connecting member 10336 connected to the rear side of the operation element 10335 .

The manipulator 10335 is arranged between a right cover member 10331 arranged on the right side in front view, a left cover member 10332 arranged on the left side in front view, and between the right cover member 10331 and the left cover member 10332. and a vibrating device 333.

The right cover member 10331 includes a circular plate-shaped circular portion 331a and a right first wall portion 331c projecting from the outer edge of the circular portion 331a toward the left cover member 10332 (arrow L direction). , a right third wall portion 331e located inside the right first wall portion 331c and erected in an annular shape from the circular portion 331a; It mainly includes a portion 10331g and an engaging portion 10331h protruding from the circumference of the shaft portion 10331g toward the rear side.

The left cover member 10332 is formed in substantially the same shape by reversing the right cover member 10331 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). a circular portion 332a formed in a shape, a left first wall portion 332c protruding from the outer edge of the circular portion 332a toward the right cover member 10331 (arrow R direction), and the left first wall portion 332c. A left third wall portion 332e located inside and erected in an annular shape from the circular portion 332a, a shaft portion 10332g projecting from the circular portion 332a toward the back side in a semicircular columnar shape, and the shaft portion 10332g. and an engaging portion 10332h projecting from the periphery toward the back side.

Therefore, in the following description, the right cover member 10331 will be described as a representative, and description of the left cover member 332 will be omitted. Note that the difference between the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 will be described later.

The shaft portion 10331g is combined with the shaft portion 10332g of the left cover member 10332 to have a cylindrical outer shape. The columnar portion formed by the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g is a shaft supported by a connecting member 10336, which will be described later. 10331g1 and 10332g1 are provided.

The bulging portions 10331g1 and 10332g1 have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of recessed portions 10331i and 10332i formed in a semicircular shape in a connecting member 10336 described later. Accordingly, by disposing the connecting member 10336 from the outside of the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g and accommodating the base end sides of the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g inside the concave portions 10331i and 10332i, the connecting member 10336 The manipulator 10335 can be pivotally supported in a rotatable state.

The engaging portion 10331h formed on the right cover member 10331 protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the shaft portion 10331g. On the other hand, an engaging portion 10332h formed on the left cover member 10332 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the shaft portion 10332g.

The connecting member 10336 mainly includes a right connecting member 10336a arranged on the right side in front view, and a left connecting member 10336b arranged on the left side in front view. The right connecting member 10336a is positioned on the back side of the right cover member 10331 described above, and the left connecting member 10336b is positioned on the back side of the left cover member 10332 described above.

The right connecting member 10336a includes a protruding portion 331b extending toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and an edge portion extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the protruding portion 331b. A right second wall portion 331d protruding toward the side, a protruding portion 331f protruding from the back side end of the protruding portion 331b toward the back side, and a left side connection from the front side end of the protruding portion 331b. and a right third wall portion 10331j projecting toward the member 10336b.

The left connecting member 10336b is formed to have substantially the same shape by reversing the right connecting member 10336a in the left-right direction. A left second wall portion 332d protruding toward the right connecting member 10336a from an edge extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the protruding portion 332b, and a rear side from the rear side end of the protruding portion 332b. and a left third wall portion 10332j projecting from the front end of the projecting portion 331b toward the right connecting member 10336a. Therefore, in the following description, the right connecting member 10336a will be described as a representative, and the description of the left connecting member 10336b will be omitted.

The right third wall portion 10331j is formed at a position facing the rear side of the right cover member 10331, and has a semicircular recessed portion 10331i at a position corresponding to the shaft portion 10331g of the right cover member 10331. . Further, an engaged portion 10331k is provided above the recessed portion 10331i.

The engaged portion 10331k is a projection with which the engaging portion 10332h of the left cover member 10332 is engaged when the right cover member 10331 and the left cover member 10332 of the grip unit 10330 are rotated. It is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus. When the operating unit 10320 is placed at the initial position, the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h are placed adjacent to each other (see FIG. 16(b)).

Further, as described above, the manipulator 10335 is pivotally supported in a rotatable state with respect to the connecting member 10336. Therefore, when the manipulator 10335 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, , the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) are engaged, and the connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced as the manipulator 10335 is rotated.

On the other hand, when the connecting member 10336 is rotated clockwise in front view, the engagement between the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) is released, and the connecting member Only 10336 is rotationally displaced.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, displacement of the operation unit 10320 when the player rotates the operation unit 10320 will be described. 57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 57(c) and 57(d) are sectional views of the operation unit 10320. FIG. 57(c) and 57(d) correspond to cross sections of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG. 55(b). 57(a) and 57(c) illustrate the operation unit 10320 at the initial position, and FIGS. 57(b) and 57(d) illustrate the operation unit 10320 at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the manipulator 10335 of the operating unit 10320 is rotationally displaced, the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) are engaged. As the manipulator 10335 rotates, the connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced. As a result, the rotating unit 340 coupled to the connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced, and the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is displaced along the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the displacement of the operation unit 10320 when the player pushes (slides) the operation unit 10320 to the rear side will be described. 58(a) and 58(b) are side views of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 58(c) and 58(d) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit 10320. FIG. 58(c) and 58(d) correspond to cross sections of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG. 55(b). 58(a) and 58(c) illustrate the operation unit 10320 in the initial position, and FIGS. 58(b) and 58(d) illustrate the operation unit 10320 in the position.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the manipulator 10335 of the operation unit 10320 is pushed (slid) to the rear side, the coupling member 10336 is pushed to the rear side in conjunction with the pushing operation. By pushing the connecting member 10336 to the back side, the rotation unit 340 fastened to the connecting member 10336 is pushed to the back side. As a result, the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is guided by the guide groove 351 of the guiding unit 350 and the rotating unit 340 is rotated. Accordingly, the connecting member 10336 to which the rotating unit 340 is fastened is also rotated as the rotating unit 340 rotates.

On the other hand, since the connecting member 10336 and the manipulator 10335 are not fastened together, only the connecting member 10336 is rotated clockwise with respect to the manipulator 10335 when viewed from the front. Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, when the player pushes the operation unit 10320, the manipulator 10335 is not rotated. is not rotated. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation unit 10320 .

Next, a case where the player rotates the operation unit 10320 counterclockwise will be described. When the operation unit 10320 is rotationally displaced counterclockwise, the engagement between the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) is released, and only the operator 10335 is disengaged. It is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

As a result, for example, when the player makes a mistake in the operation method and rotates the operation unit 10320 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the player can be notified that the operation direction is incorrect. In addition, when the player who has finished playing the game stands up by holding the operation unit 10320 to stand up, the front view counterclockwise force input to the operator 10335 idly rotates the operator 10335 in the front view counterclockwise. Therefore, transmission of the force to the rotation unit 340 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 10320 from being damaged when the player grips the operator 10335 for a purpose other than operating the operation unit 10320 .

Note that the operator 10335 is rotatable to a position where the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10331h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10332h) are in contact with each other (in the present embodiment). In terms of form, the manipulator 10335 can be rotated approximately 160 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, the return of the manipulator 10335 rotated counterclockwise in front view to the initial position is performed by a spring member (not shown) interposed between the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g of the manipulator 10335 and the connecting member 10336. ) is performed by the biasing force. As a result, it is possible to return the manipulator 10335 rotated counterclockwise in front view to the initial position and to maintain the manipulator 10335 at the initial position.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, a guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 is guided in the same region of the guide groove 351 by the displacement from the initial position to the terminal position and the displacement from the terminal position to the initial position of the operation unit 320 will be described. However, in the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment, the guided member 344 moves in different regions of the guide groove 11351 depending on the displacement of the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the terminal position and the displacement from the terminal position to the initial position. be guided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 59(a) is a front view of the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 59(b) is a sectional view of the guide unit 11350 along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

As shown in FIG. 59, the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment includes a front side guide unit 11360 arranged on the front side and a rear side guide unit 11370 arranged on the rear side of the front side guide unit 11360. And prepare.

The front-side guide unit 360 is formed by combining two members formed in an annular shape. and a second annular member 11362 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).

The second annular member 11362 includes a cylindrical first cylindrical portion 11362a, a cylindrical second cylindrical portion 362b that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 11362a and surrounds the first cylindrical portion 11362a, Prepare.

The first cylindrical portion 11362a has a plurality of protruding portions 362a1 that protrude from the inner peripheral surface, and is located at the rear side (arrow B direction side) end of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. and a recessed portion 11362a2 recessed radially outward of the first cylindrical portion 11362a from the inner peripheral surface side of the first cylindrical portion 11362a radially outwardly of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. and a housing recess 362a5.

The recessed portion 11362a2 is a portion in which the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is arranged, and is formed along the entire circumference of the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. Further, in the recessed portion 11362a2, points A (see FIG. 59(b)) at which the recessed distance from the rear end portion to the front side is maximum are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the intervals between the points A are formed at intervals of approximately 45 degrees in the circumferential direction.

In addition, one side of the concave portion 11362a2 connected to the point A is formed in a straight line toward the back side (the direction of the arrow B), and the other side is formed to be inclined in a straight line connecting to the back side end of the one side. .

The back side guide unit 11370 includes a first portion 371 formed in an annular shape, a second portion 11372 projecting from the first portion 371 toward the front side, and a front side along the outer edge of the first portion 371. and a third portion 373 provided.

The second portion 11372 protrudes along the inner edge side of the first portion 371 toward the second annular member 362 (front side). The second portion 11372 has a protruding distal end surface spaced from the end portion of the concave portion 11362a2 of the second annular member 11362 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) (more than the diameter of the guided member 344). are set at positions separating them by a large distance).

As a result, the guide unit 11350 is formed with a guide groove 11351 recessed radially outward in a part of the inner peripheral surface. The guide groove 11351 is a groove for guiding the rotating unit 340 (see FIG. 16B), and the width of the groove is set larger than the outline of the guided member 344 .

A plurality of guide grooves 11351 are continuously formed in a predetermined shape in the circumferential direction, and are formed along the inner peripheral surface of the guide unit 11350 .

The guide groove 11351 includes a first guide surface 351a serving as a guide surface (a wall surface for restricting the movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 11362 side (front side), and a second guide surface. 351b, a third guide surface 351c that serves as a guide surface for the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), a fourth guide surface 351d, and a guide surface directed from the fourth guide surface 11351d to the front side. and a sixth guide surface 11351h which is a guide surface directed from the second guide surface to the front side.

The fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h are formed facing each other. In addition, the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h are set such that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344 . As a result, the guided member 344 can be moved while its moving direction is restricted by the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h. In the following description, the movement area of the guided member 344 formed between the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h facing each other will be referred to as a "third guide area".

One end of the fifth guide surface 11351g is connected to the fourth guide surface 351d at the end opposite to the connection with the third guide surface 351c, and the end opposite to the connection with the fourth guide surface 351d. The other end is connected to the third guide surface 351c. That is, the fifth guide surface 11351g connects the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d, which are formed adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction, in the front-rear direction.

The sixth guide surface 11351h has one end connected to the second guide surface 351b at the end opposite to the connection side with the first guide surface 351a, and the first guide surface 11351h at the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide surface 351b. The other end side is connected to the guide surface 351a. That is, the sixth guide surface 11351h connects the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b, which are formed adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction, in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, one end of the third guide area formed between the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h is connected to the second guide area on the opposite end to the connection side of the first guide area. , the other end side is connected to the first guide region at the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide region. Thereby, a plurality of the first guide region to the third guide region can be continuously formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the guide groove 11351 formed as described above, the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 16(a)) does not receive force from the outside of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1). 14), the rotation unit 340 is urged toward the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14), so that the guided member 344 moves toward the first guide surface. 351a (first guide area) or along the third guide area to the connecting portion (point A side) between the first guide area and the third guide area. As a result, when the operation unit 320 is not operated, the operation unit 320 is stopped (maintained) at the position pushed forward.

In addition, the sixth guide surface 11351h has an inclined surface 11351h1 at a connecting portion with the first guide area (the first guide surface 351a). The inclined surface 11351h1 is a surface that guides the guided member 344, which is guided in the third guide area from the back side toward the front side, to the first guide area using the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 toward the front side. , is inclined in a direction opposite to the inclination direction of the first guide surface 351a with respect to the pushing (sliding) direction of the operation unit 320. As shown in FIG. Further, the guided member 344 guided by the inclined surface 11351h1 and arranged in the first guiding area is arranged at a position where its center overlaps with the third guiding surface 351c in the pushing (sliding) direction of the operation unit 320 . As a result, when the operation unit 320 is pushed toward the rear side after the member to be guided 344 has been guided from the third guiding region to the first guiding region along the inclined surface 11351h1, the member to be guided 344 is guided to the first guiding region. 3 can be guided along the guide surface 351c.

Next, the operation unit 320 is operated by the player to rotate the gripping unit 330 clockwise in front view, or the operation unit 320 is operated by the player to move the gripping unit 330 to the rear side (arrow B direction side). , the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 coupled with the gripping unit 330 moves in the first guiding region of the guiding groove 11351 .

Therefore, when the gripping unit 330 is rotated clockwise in front view, the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 is moved in the first guide area of the guide groove 11351 . In this case, as the guided member 344 is moved rearward (in the direction of the arrow B) with respect to the guide unit 11350, the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) is inserted inside the guide unit 11350. direction (back side).

After the guided member 344 has moved in the first guiding area, if the gripping unit 330 continues to rotate clockwise in front view, the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 that is fastened to the gripping unit 330 moves into the guide groove 11351 . , and comes into contact with the fifth guide surface 11351g. This restricts the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 when viewed from the front.

When the player stops the operation of the operation unit 320 from the position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted (the position where the guided member 344 contacts the fifth guide surface 11351g), The rotating unit 340 is pushed forward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 moves in the third guiding area. Therefore, the operation unit 320 can be pushed out to the front side at the position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 in the front view is restricted, and the operation unit 320 can be arranged at the initial position. That is, each time the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise in front view, the initial position of the operation unit 320 is changed to a position rotated clockwise by a certain amount.

In this case, since the third guide area is formed so that the guided member 344 is moved a shorter distance than the combined area of the first guide area and the second guide area, the operation unit 320 is continuously operated a plurality of times. When an operator operates the operation unit 320, the time required for the operation unit 320 to return to the initial position can be shortened, and the operation unit 320 can be easily rotated clockwise a plurality of times in succession. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

On the other hand, when the player moves the operation unit 320 to the opposite side (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) from the position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted (the position where the guided member 344 contacts the fifth guide surface 11351g). When the operation of the operation unit 320 is turned off, the rotation unit 340 is pushed forward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 is moved to the second guide surface 351b and the second guide surface 351b. It is moved to the front side along the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the operation unit 320 moved to the initial position is arranged at the same rotational position (phase) in the front view of the operation unit 320 before being operated.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, whether or not the player operates the operation unit 320 counterclockwise when viewed from the front at a position where the operation of rotating the operation unit 320 clockwise when viewed from the front is restricted, the operation unit 320 rotates to the front. You can change the rotation position when pushed to the side. As a result, variations can be given to the operation of the operation unit 320, so that the player can be easily entertained.

Further, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 at the initial position to the back side (arrow B direction side) and the guided member 344 moves in the first guidance area, the guided member 344 moves to the second guidance area. , and the movement of the guided member 344 is restricted at the connecting portion between the first guiding area and the second guiding area.

After the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d of the second guide area and its movement is restricted, when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 320, the rotation unit 340 is set to the coil spring. The guided member 344 is pushed forward by the urging force of SP1 and moved forward along the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the operation unit 320 moved to the initial position is arranged at the same rotational position (phase) in the front view of the operation unit 320 before being operated.

On the other hand, when the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front after the guided member 344 abuts against the fourth guide surface 351d of the second guide area and its movement is restricted, the operation is performed from the initial position. As in the case where the unit 320 is rotated, the guided member 334 moves in the second guide area of the guide groove 11351 and comes into contact with the fifth guide surface 11351g, causing the operation unit 320 to rotate clockwise in front view. Regulated.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation of the operation unit 320 that changes the rotational position (phase) of the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position in the front view and the rotation position of the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position in the front view It is possible to operate the operation unit 320 with the same (phase). Therefore, since variations can be provided in the operation method of the operation unit 320, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the eleventh embodiment, in order to detect the position of the operation unit 320 in the front-rear direction, a cylindrical detection piece (not shown) protrudes from the back side of the rotation unit 340 at the rotation center of the operation unit 320. A sensor device (not shown) for detecting the detection piece is arranged in the base unit 391 (see FIG. 14) at the position where the operation unit 320 has moved to the rear side. This makes it possible to detect the movement of the operation unit 320 to the rear side regardless of the phase in which the operation unit 320 is arranged in the front view.

The rotation unit 340 has a plurality of protrusions (not shown) protruding toward the front side on the same circumference around the rotation axis of the operation unit 320 . Also, the plurality of protrusions are distributed over a half circumference of the circumference of the operation unit 320 centered on the rotation axis. Further, the plurality of protrusions are formed with a distance from adjacent protrusions corresponding to the rotation of the initial position of the operation unit 320 in a front view by one rotation operation of the operation unit 320 .

On the other hand, in the reduced-diameter portion 361b of the front-side guide unit 360 of the guide unit 11350, a plurality of detection sensors for detecting the protrusions are arranged at positions facing the plurality of protrusions of the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position. be done. This makes it possible to detect the phase of the operation unit 320 at the initial position by detecting the detection positions and the number of detections of the plurality of protrusions with respect to the plurality of detection sensors.

Furthermore, in order to prevent the wires connected to the operation unit 320 from becoming entangled due to the rotational displacement of the operation unit 320 , the wires are connected to the operation unit 320 through the rotation center position of the rotation unit 340 . Moreover, a rotary connector or a slip ring is interposed in a part of the wiring.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, the guide groove 12351 of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f of the guide groove 351 are formed in separate members (the front-side guide unit 360 and the back-side guide unit 370) has been described. In the twelfth embodiment, the first end 12351e and the second end 351f of the guide groove 12351 are formed on the same member (back side guide unit 370). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

60(a) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit 12350. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 60, the guide groove 12351 of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the guide groove 351 of the first embodiment, and the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the rear It extends in the circumferential direction of the first portion 371 of the side guide unit 370 and is formed in a shape that partially inclines toward the rear side.

Further, the guide groove 12351 includes a first guide surface 351a serving as a guide surface (a wall surface for restricting the movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side (front side), and a second guide surface 351a. A guide surface 351b, a third guide surface 351c that serves as a guide surface for the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), a fourth guide surface 351d, and the second annular ring of the front side guide unit 360 It mainly includes a member 362 and a first end portion 12351e and a second end portion 351f that serve as ends in the circumferential direction of the first portion 371 of the back-side guide unit 370 .

The first end 12351e in the twelfth embodiment is formed in the front guide unit 360. As shown in FIG. Similarly, the second end portion 351f is also formed in the front guide unit 360. As shown in FIG. These end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) define the operation end points of the operation unit 320, and are easily damaged because the guided member 344 collides with them. Therefore, both ends (first end 12351e and second end 351f) are formed on the same member (front-side guide unit 360), so that both ends (first end 12351e and second end 351f) If the portion 351f) is damaged, only one member (the front side guide unit 360) needs to be replaced, and the two members, the front side guide unit 360 and the rear side guide unit 370, need not be replaced. By doing so, both ends of the guide groove 12351 can be replaced.

In particular, the front-side guide unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape that is continuous in the circumferential direction and has a plurality of projecting portions 362a1 extending at predetermined intervals. Therefore, it is easy to suppress damage when the guided member 344 collides with both ends (the first end 12351e and the second end 351f). Therefore, the replacement cycle can be lengthened.

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the guide groove 13351 of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f of the guide groove 351 are formed in separate members (the front-side guide unit 360 and the back-side guide unit 370) has been described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the first end 351e and the second end 13351f of the guide groove 13351 are formed on the same member (back side guide unit 370). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 61(a) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 61(b) is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, the guide groove 13351 of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the guide groove 351 of the first embodiment, and is formed by the second annular member 362 of the front-side guide unit 360 and the rear surface. It extends in the circumferential direction of the first portion 371 of the side guide unit 370 and is formed in a shape that partially inclines toward the rear side.

In addition, the guide groove 13351 includes a first guide surface 351a serving as a guide surface (a wall surface for restricting the movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side (front side), and a second guide surface 351a. A guide surface 351b, a third guide surface 351c that serves as a guide surface for the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), a fourth guide surface 351d, and the second annular ring of the front side guide unit 360 It mainly includes a member 362 and a first end portion 351e and a second end portion 13351f that serve as circumferential ends of the first portion 371 of the rear-side guide unit 370 .

The second end 13351f in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the back side guide unit 370. As shown in FIG. Similarly, the first end 351e is also formed in the back side guide unit 370. As shown in FIG. These end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) define the operation end points of the operation unit 320, and are easily damaged because the guided member 344 collides with them. Therefore, both ends (first end 12351e and second end 351f) are formed on the same member (back side guide unit 370), so that both ends (first end 12351e and second end 351f) If the portion 351f) is damaged, only one member (back side guide unit 370) needs to be replaced, and replacement of two members, the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370, can be eliminated.

In particular, since the back side guide unit 370 is a member forming the back side of the guide unit 13350, it is easy to replace only the back side guide unit 370. FIG. For example, in a configuration in which both ends (first end 12351e and second end 351f) are formed on the front side guide unit 360, the rear side guide unit 370 is removed and the front side guide unit 360 is replaced by the first annular member. 361 and the second annular member 362, and it is also necessary to remove the operation unit 320 during this disassembly.

On the other hand, if both ends (the first end 12351e and the second end 351f) are formed on the back side guide unit 370, only the back side guide unit 370 needs to be removed, and the front side guide unit 360 can be removed. into the first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362, and the operation unit 320 need not be removed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the replacement man-hours and reduce the replacement cost.

Next, referring to FIG. 62(a), the guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide region and the second guide region of the guide groove 351 are set to be the same. The displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide region and the second guide region are set opposite to each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 62(a) is a sectional view of the guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 62(a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 23(d).

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide groove 14351 of the guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in the second annular member 362 of the front-side guide unit 360 and the first part 371 of the back-side guide unit 370. It is formed in a shape extending in the circumferential direction and partly inclined toward the back side.

The guide groove 14351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351a, which serve as guide surfaces for the guided member 344 (wall surfaces that regulate the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is rotated. 14351b, a third guide surface 351c that serves as a guide surface for the guided member 344 (a wall surface that defines the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is pushed, a fourth guide surface 14351d, and a peripheral A first end portion 351e, a second end portion 14351f, and a third end portion 14351i are provided at three locations formed at the ends of the direction.

The second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d are formed facing each other. In addition, the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d are the ends of the first guide area (first end 351e) formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c. ) and extend in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the operation unit 320) from the end of the first guide area. That is, the second guide area formed between the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d is formed with the second end 14351f as the starting end and the third end 14351i as the terminating end.

In addition, the second guide surface 14351 b and the fourth guide surface 14351 d are set so that the minimum distance between them is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344 . As a result, the guided member 344 can be moved while its movement direction is restricted by the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the moving direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving the first guiding area toward the second guiding area and the moving direction of the second guiding area toward its terminal end (third end portion 14351i). The movement direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving is set to be opposite.

Therefore, in order to displace the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the end position, the player needs to switch the rotation direction of the operation unit 320 to the opposite direction (for example, from right to left). As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation unit in a complicated manner, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, since the second guide area (fourth guide surface 14351d) extends in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the operation unit 320), when the operation unit 320 is pushed, the guided member 344 cannot be moved along the second guide region to the third end 14351i.

Furthermore, the moving direction of the guided member 344 from the start end to the end in the second guiding region is set to be the same as the direction in which the guided member 344 moves due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP2 (see FIG. 27(a)). The second guide surface 14351b, which is pushed forward by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14) and contacts the guided member 344, extends in the horizontal direction. The guided member 344 can be maintained in contact with the third end 14351i.

As a result, when the operation unit 320 in the state where the guided member 344 is guided to the position where it abuts against the third end portion 14351i is returned to the initial position, the player rotates the operation unit 320 clockwise from the front. can be made Therefore, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be made complicated, and the monotonous operation of the operation unit 320 can be prevented from deteriorating the interest of the player.

In addition, since the rotation direction when the operation unit 320 arranged at the end position is returned is the same as the rotation direction when the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position is displaced, the player can Mistakes in the rotation direction of the operation unit 320 can be suppressed.

In this way, an operation of displacing the operation unit 320 from the initial position (the position where the guided member 344 is arranged at the first end 351e) to the terminal position (the position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). , the player can be required to perform a two-step operation (an operation to switch the direction of rotation midway). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operational feeling from becoming monotonous. Further, it is possible to avoid displacing the operation unit 320 to the end position (the position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end portion 14351i) only by the pushing operation. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 320 from being displaced to the terminal position due to the player's careless operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 62(b), the guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction in the circumferential direction of the first guide region and the second guide region of the guide groove 351 is set to be the same. The displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide region and the second guide region are set opposite to each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 62(b) is a sectional view of the guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 62(b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 23(d).

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide groove 15351 of the guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed between the second annular member 362 of the front-side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back-side guide unit 370. It extends in the circumferential direction and is formed in a shape that as a whole inclines toward the back side.

The guide groove 15351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 15351b that serve as guide surfaces (wall surfaces that regulate the movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 when the operation unit 320 is rotated. , a third guide surface 351c and a fourth guide surface 15351d that serve as guide surfaces for the guided member 344 (wall surfaces that regulate the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is pushed, and It has a first end portion 351e, a second end portion 15351f, and a third end portion 15351i, which are formed at three locations.

The second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d are formed facing each other. In addition, the second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d are the ends of the first guide area (first end 351e) formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c. and extends in the circumferential direction from the terminal end of the first guide region while being inclined to the side opposite to the first guide region. That is, the second guide area formed between the second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d is formed starting from the second end 15351f and ending at the third end 15351i.

In addition, the second guide surface 15351 b and the fourth guide surface 15351 d are set so that the minimum distance between them is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344 . As a result, the guided member 344 can be moved while its movement direction is restricted by the second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d.

Further, when the player pushes (slides) the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the operation unit 320 moves along the third guide surface 351c of the first guide area and the fourth guide surface 15351d of the second guide area. , the guided member 344 can be moved. Therefore, when the player presses and displaces the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the operation unit 320 can be displaced from the initial position to the end position without changing the displacement direction of the operation unit 320 .

In the fifteenth embodiment, the moving direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving the first guiding area toward the second guiding area and the moving direction of the second guiding area toward its terminal end (third end portion 14351i). The movement direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving is set to be opposite.

Therefore, in order to displace the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the end position, the player needs to switch the rotation direction of the operation unit 320 to the opposite direction (for example, from right to left). As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation unit in a complicated manner, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the second guide area (fourth guide surface 14351d) is inclined and extended, the pushing operation of the operation unit 320 also moves the guided member 344 along the second guide area. It can be moved up to the third end 14351i.

In this way, an operation of displacing the operation unit 320 from the initial position (the position where the guided member 344 is arranged at the first end 351e) to the terminal position (the position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). As for the rotation operation, the player can be required to perform a two-step operation (an operation to switch the rotation direction midway). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operational feeling from becoming monotonous. On the other hand, if it is a pushing operation, the operation unit 320 is moved from the initial position (the position where the guided member 344 is arranged at the first end 351e) to the terminal position (the position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). ) can be displaced by one-way operation.

That is, regardless of whether the operation is the rotation operation or the pushing operation, the operation unit 320 is moved from the initial position (the position where the guided member 344 is arranged at the first end portion 351e) to the terminal position (the position where the guided member 344 is located at the third end portion 351e). Since it can be displaced to the position reaching the end 14351i), the player can arbitrarily select the type of operation. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in operational feeling.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the above-described first embodiment, the back side guide unit 370 has been described as being formed from one member in which the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 are connected, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the back-side guide unit 370 may be configured such that the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 are formed from separate members, and the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 are assembled.

In this case, by separately forming the first portion 371 and the second portion 372, the shapes of the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 can be easily complicated. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the back side guide unit 370 can be improved, and variations in the moving direction of the guided member 344 displaced along the back side guide unit 370 can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351 is inclined to extend in the circumferential direction while approaching the front side (arrow F direction side) as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a. When the operation unit 320, which is formed as a guide surface and is guided to a position where the guided member 344 abuts against the second end 351f, is not operated, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 toward the front side causes the first movement. Although the case where the guided member 344 is guided to the first guiding region along the second guiding surface 351b has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the direction in which the second guide surface 351b extends in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 may extend parallel to the horizontal direction, or the second guide surface in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 may extend parallel to the horizontal direction. The extending direction of 351b may be extended in a direction approaching the front side while separating from the first guide surface 351a.

In this case, it is possible to suppress the movement of the guided member 344 toward the first guide region side due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 toward the front side. That is, the guided member 344 can be maintained at a position in contact with the second end portion 351f. Therefore, when the operation unit 320 in the state where the guided member 344 is guided to the position where it abuts on the second end 351f is to be returned to the initial position, the player is instructed to rotate the operation unit 320 counterclockwise from the front. can be made Therefore, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be made complicated, and the monotonous operation of the operation unit 320 can be prevented from deteriorating the interest of the player.

In addition, when the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is guided toward the first guide region side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2 of the base unit 391, the second guide member 362 in the circumferential direction By increasing the inclination angle of the surface 351b toward the front side, the guided member 344 can be maintained at a position in contact with the second end portion 351f.

Further, when the extending direction of the second guide surface 351b in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 is extended parallel to the horizontal direction, when the operation unit 320 is rotated from the initial position to the terminal position, Since the guided member 344 is guided by the first guide region and the second guide region that extend in different directions, the slide displacement to the rear side relative to the amount of rotation of the operation unit 320 is not reduced during the rotation of the operation unit 320. Displacement. That is, while the operation unit 320 is rotationally displaced, the sliding displacement to the back side is not formed. This makes the operation of the operation unit 320 interesting.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the two hooks 5396m prevent the displacement unit 5395 from being displaced toward the front side of the base plate 5392a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one end side (rear side) of the roller 5396j formed in an annular shape in the axial direction is enlarged beyond the width of the sliding groove 5392a2, and the displacement unit 5395 is displaced toward the front side of the base plate 5392a by the roller 5396j. You may refrain from doing so. In this case, after disposing the displacement unit 5395 on the front surface of the base plate 5392a, the displacement unit 5395 is disposed on the base unit 5391 by attaching the roller 5396j.

In the fifth embodiment, the size of the engaging hole 5396b1 in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a is substantially the same as the size of the engaging piece 342b in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a. Although a case has been described in which the displacement is set and the displacement of the displacement unit 5395 and the operation unit 320 are always interlocked, the invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the size of the engagement hole 5396b1 in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a may be set larger than the size of the engagement piece 342b in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a. In this case, a difference is provided between the timing of operating the displacement unit 5395 and the timing of operating the operation unit 320 by the gap between the engaging hole 5396b1 and the engaging piece 342b in the circumferential direction about the center of the body portion 396a. can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the displacement direction of the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) is controlled by the roller 5396j disposed on the rotation shaft portion 5396i of the first displacement member 5396 and the sliding groove 5392a2 of the base member 5392. Although the case of regulation has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the rotating shaft portion 5396i of the first displacement member 5396 is not formed (the roller 5396j is not mounted), and the displacement direction of the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) is set to two hook portions 5396m and the base member 5392. You may regulate by sliding groove 5392a2. In this case, since the two hook portions 5396m are formed to be elastically deformable, the meshing state between the tooth portion 5396k of the first displacement member 5396 and the pinion 5398a deteriorates, and the resistance between the tooth portion 5396k and the pinion 5398a increases. In this case, the hook portion 5396m can be elastically deformed to stabilize the engagement between the tooth portion 5396k and the pinion 5398a.

In this case, it is preferable that the two hook portions 5396m are set so that the outer distance in the facing direction in the radial direction of the body portion 396a is substantially the same as the width direction of the sliding groove 5392a2. Accordingly, when the hook portion 5396m is elastically deformed in a direction in which the engagement with the sliding groove 5392a2 is released, it is possible to prevent the tip of the hook portion 5396m and the base plate 5392a from overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the hook portion 5396m from being disengaged from the sliding groove 5392a2.

In addition, the two hook portions 5396m are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two hook portions 5396m on the outer side in the radial direction of the body portion 396a is set to be larger than the width direction of the sliding groove 5392a2. may be engaged with the slide groove 5392a2. In this case, the force required for elastic deformation of the hook portion 5396m in the direction of releasing the engagement with the slide groove 5392a2 can be increased, so the engagement between the hook portion 5396m and the slide groove 5392a2 is released. can be suppressed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the restricting piece 7392f is formed with the second protrusion 7392f2 and the second displacement member 7397 is formed with the recess 7397f1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a concave portion may be formed in the restricting piece 7392f and a convex portion may be formed in the second displacement member 7397 so that when the displacement unit 7395 is arranged at the initial urging position, the restricting piece 7392f and the second displacement member Anything that engages with 7397 may be used.

In the tenth embodiment, the operation element 10335 is formed so as to be idly rotatable counterclockwise in a front view with respect to the connecting member 10336, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the bulged portions 10331g1 and 10332g1 of the manipulator 10335 are deformed and the manipulator 10335 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bulged portions 10331g1 and 10332g2 are attached to the projecting portions 331b and 332b of the connecting member 10336. The counterclockwise rotation of the manipulator 10335 in a front view may be restricted by bringing it into contact with the manipulator 10335 .

In this case, the operation unit 10320 does not need to have means (for example, a spring member) for returning the operator 10335 to the initial position, so the number of parts of the operation unit 10320 can be reduced. Also, the assembly of the operation unit 10320 can be simplified.

In the tenth embodiment, the operation element 10335 rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member. The center of gravity of the element 10335 is set to the lower position of the operator 10335 arranged at the initial position, and the operator 10335 that has been rotated counterclockwise in front view returns to the initial position by the own weight of the operator 10335. may be

In the eleventh embodiment, the guide groove 11351 is formed of the first guide region, the second guide region, and the third guide region. may be omitted and the guide groove 111351 may be formed only in the first guide region and the third guide region.

In this case, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the guided member 344 moving in the first guide area is moved along the third guide surface 351c, and is moved from the first guide area to the third guide area. moved to the area. Therefore, when the player depresses the operation unit 320 and then de-operates the operation unit 320, the rotating unit 340 is pushed forward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 is moved to the third guiding position. Move the area towards the front side.

In the third guiding area, the distance over which the guided member 344 is moved is shorter than in the first guiding area. It is possible to shorten the time required to return to , making it easier to operate the operation unit 320 a plurality of times in succession. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, in order to detect the position of the operation unit 320 in the front-rear direction, a case has been described in which a cylindrical detection piece is protruded from the back side of the rotation unit at the rotation center of the operation unit 320. It is not limited to this. For example, an annular projecting wall centered on the rotation center of the operation unit 320 may be projected from the back side of the rotating unit 340, and the sensor device may be arranged at a position where the projecting wall can be detected.

In the first, third, fifth to seventh embodiments, the displacement units 395, 3395, 5395, and 7395 are rotationally displaced when viewed from the front. Linear displacement of displacement unit 2395, 4395 in 2, 4 embodiments may be used. On the contrary, in the second and fourth embodiments, the displacement units 2395 and 4395 are linearly displaced. It may be rotationally displaced.

The displacement units 395, 2395, 3395, 4395, 5395, and 7395 in the first through seventh embodiments may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is embodied for the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so medals as game value can be eliminated in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation place of the game machine due to separate handling of the game machine and the ball.

It is also possible to apply the present invention to a pachinko machine. In the case of a pachinko machine, a game machine main body is attached to an outer frame, and a door member is provided on the front side of the game machine main body. In the main body of the game machine, a game area is formed as a game ball flight area, and a game board with an operation opening, a liquid crystal display device, etc. is installed. The display device is visible. When the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device enters the operation opening, an internal lottery is performed and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the liquid crystal display device. Even if the configuration of the display control device and the sub-control device of the above embodiment is applied to such a pachinko machine, it is clear that the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that confirms and displays the symbols after variably displaying a sequence of symbols, and does not have a handle for hitting balls. things are mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Base Unit 390 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and holding means for holding the displacement member on the base member, wherein the holding means is elastically deformable. When the displacement member is attached to the base member, the elastic portion in contact with the displacement member is elastically deformed to allow the displacement member to be attached to the base member. 2. A game machine A1, wherein when said displacement member mounted on said base member is brought into contact with said elastic part, displacement of said displacement member in the contacting direction is regulated by said elastic part.

Here, a game machine is known in which a displacement member is slidably disposed on a base member (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-130539). In this technique, a groove is formed in the base member, and the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted through the groove. Therefore, the end point of the slide displacement of the displacement member is defined by the contact of the protrusion with the end of the groove. A collar larger than the width of the groove is fastened and fixed to the tip of the protrusion. As a result, the displacement member is held by the base member and is prevented from falling off.

Also known is a game machine that defines the end point of slide displacement by positioning a wall portion erected from a base member on the displacement trajectory of the displacement member and bringing the displacement member into contact with the wall portion ( For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-29609). A cover member is arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is accommodated between the base member and the cover member. As a result, the displacement member is held by the base member and is prevented from falling off.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, separate parts such as a collar and a cover member are required, and these separate parts need to be fastened and fixed to the base member with screws, increasing the number of man-hours. Therefore, there was a problem that the product cost increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the elastic portion is elastically deformed so that the displacement member is attached to the base member, and after the attachment, the displacement of the displacement member is restricted by the elastically recovered elastic portion. . That is, the displacement member is held by the base member. Therefore, not only is the need for separate parts unnecessary, but also the step of attaching such separate parts can be eliminated, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine A1, the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and the displacement member is at least a displacement trajectory when displaced between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine A2 is attached to the base member by being displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement trajectory at a partially overlapping position and then being displaced along the displacement regulation.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the displacement member is orthogonal to the displacement locus at a position overlapping at least a part of the displacement locus when displaced between the first position and the second position. After being displaced in the direction of displacement, the displacement member is attached to the base member by being displaced along the displacement regulation. can. Therefore, the space on the base member required for mounting the displacement member can be reduced by the amount of overlap.

In the gaming machine A2, a projection projecting from one of the base member and the displacement member and a recess formed in the other of the base member and the displacement member so that the projection can pass through A gaming machine A3, wherein the displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement locus at a position overlapping at least a part of the displacement locus by the protrusion passing through the recess.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement locus at a position overlapping at least a part of the displacement locus by the projection passing through the recess. Therefore, when the displacement member is attached to the base member, it is possible to further increase the overlapping margin between the displacement locus of the displacement member and the displacement member. Therefore, the space required on the base member for mounting the displacement member can be made smaller.

A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, the elastic portion is engaged with the base member or the displacement member in a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the first position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the elastic portion is engaged with the base member or the displacement member in a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the first position. It is possible to suppress elastic deformation in the direction of contact each time the member or displacement member contacts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic portion from being deformed.

A gaming machine A5 in the gaming machine A4, further comprising biasing means for applying a biasing force to the displacement member in a direction to hold the displacement member at the first position.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, since it is provided with a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the displacement member in a direction to hold the displacement member at the first position, the elastic portion can be either the base member or the It is possible to maintain the state of contact and engagement with the displacement member (the state in which the elastic deformation of the elastic portion is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic portion from being improperly elastically deformed to remove the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Base Unit 390 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and holding means for holding the displacement member on the base member, wherein the holding means comprises the base member or the A gaming machine B1, comprising an elastic portion elastically deformable disposed on one side of a displacement member, wherein the displacement member is held by the elastic portion on the base member.

Here, a game machine is known in which a displacement member is slidably disposed on a base member (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-130539). In this technique, a groove is formed in the base member, and the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted through the groove. Therefore, the end point of the slide displacement of the displacement member is defined by the contact of the protrusion with the end of the groove. A collar larger than the width of the groove is fastened and fixed to the tip of the protrusion. As a result, the displacement member is held by the base member and is prevented from falling off.

Also known is a game machine that defines the end point of slide displacement by positioning a wall portion erected from a base member on the displacement trajectory of the displacement member and bringing the displacement member into contact with the wall portion ( For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-29609). A cover member is arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is accommodated between the base member and the cover member. As a result, the displacement member is held by the base member and is prevented from falling off.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, separate parts such as a collar and a cover member need to be fastened and fixed to the base member with screws, so there is a problem that assembly is complicated.

In contrast, according to the game machine B1, the holding means includes an elastic portion elastically deformable on either the base member or the displacement member, and the displacement member is held by the base member by the elastic portion. , it is unnecessary to fasten and fix separate parts such as a collar and a lid member with screws. Therefore, assembly can be facilitated.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that in the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is held by the elastic portion on the base member by being displaced in one direction.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the displacement member is held by the base member by the elastic portion by being displaced in one direction, so there is no need to perform complicated operations. That is, for example, the displacement member can be held by the base member by a simple operation such as pushing in one direction. Therefore, assembly can be facilitated.

In the game machine B2, the holding means includes an engaging portion disposed on one of the base member and the displacement member and formed to be engageable with the other of the base member and the displacement member, and the displacement member is , the other of the base member and the displacement member is displaced in one direction while being engaged with the engaging portion, thereby being held by the base member by the elastic portion. B3.

According to the game machine B3, the holding means includes an engaging portion disposed on one of the base member and the displacement member and formed to engage with the other of the base member and the displacement member, and the displacement member is either the base member or the displacement member. With the other side of the displacement member engaged with the engaging portion, the displacement member is displaced in one direction, thereby being held by the base member by the elastic portion. Therefore, it can be displaced in one direction with the portion engaged with the engaging portion as a fulcrum, so that the game machine B2 can be easily assembled in addition to the effects of the game machine B2.

In addition to the elastic portion, the engaging portion can also be used as a portion for holding the displacement member to the base member, so that the holding strength can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the displacement member to fall off from the base member.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the holding means has an opening formed in the other of the base member and the displacement member and extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the opening is provided with the A gaming machine B4 characterized by having an elastic portion inserted therein.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the holding means has an opening formed in the other of the base member and the displacement member and extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since the elastic portion is inserted through the opening, space efficiency can be improved. That is, the opening and the elastic portion can have both functions of guiding displacement of the displacement member with respect to the base member and holding the displacement member on the base member. Therefore, space efficiency can be improved as compared with the case where both functions are provided separately.

A game machine B5 in the game machine B4, wherein the displacement member is formed as a rack having teeth engraved along its outer edge.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement member is formed as a rack having teeth engraved along the outer edge thereof, so that it is possible to easily secure a toothed range. That is, as described above, the function of guiding the displacement and the function of holding it can be borne by the opening and the elastic portion, and there is no need to provide both of these functions on the outer edge of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a range of engraving of teeth on the outer edge of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Base Unit 390 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising an operator displaceable by a player's operation, comprising a first member that abuts on the operator in a predetermined displacement area, and the operator operates the operator by contact with the first member. A game machine C1 characterized in that the feeling is changed.

Here, a game machine having an operator is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-29609). Examples of the manipulator include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

However, the game machine illustrated above has a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating positions of the operators.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first member is provided to contact the operator in a predetermined displacement area, and the contact with the first member changes the operation feeling of the operator. It is possible to easily grasp the operation position of the operator based on the change in the operational feeling.

In the game machine C1, the first member increases the reaction force acting on the operator as the operator approaches a predetermined position.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the first member increases the reaction force acting on the operator as the operator approaches the predetermined position, so that the operator approaches the predetermined position. can be easily recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine C2, a base member is provided on which the manipulator is displaceable, and the first member collides with the manipulator or the base member when the manipulator exceeds the predetermined position. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the operation element is provided with a base member displaceable. Vibration can be transmitted to the operator by the collision. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the manipulator has been displaced to the predetermined position.

In game machine C3, game machine C4 is characterized in that the first member collides with the base member when the manipulator exceeds the predetermined position.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the first member collides with the base member when the operator exceeds the predetermined position, so that damage to the operator can be suppressed. Since the manipulator is arranged on the base member, the vibration caused by the collision of the first member can be transmitted to the manipulator via the base member.

In any one of game machines C2 to C4, the first member is formed as an elastic body that is elastically deformed by contact with the operator, and when the operator exceeds the predetermined position, the first member is elastically deformed with the operator. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the abutment is released and the game machine collides with the base member or the manipulator by elastic recovery.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C2 to C4, the first member is formed as an elastic body that is elastically deformed by contact with the operator, and the operator exceeds the predetermined position. Then, the contact with the manipulator is released, and the base member or the manipulator collides with the base member or the manipulator due to elastic recovery, so that the structure can be simplified. That is, the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the first member can form a reaction force acting on the manipulator and a displacement of the first member due to a collision with the manipulator or the base member, thereby forming a reaction force. It is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide an actuator for collision.

In the gaming machine C5, when the operator is displaced beyond a predetermined position, the first member is released from contact with the operator and collides with the operator or the base member due to its elastic recovery. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, when the operator is displaced beyond the predetermined position, the first member is released from contact with the operator, and the elastic recovery of the first member releases the operator. Alternatively, it collides with the base member, that is, it is a mechanical structure that utilizes the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the first member. can improve.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first member has a collision portion that collides with either the base member or the operator, and when the collision portion is damaged, the other portion of the first member A game machine C7 characterized by colliding with a base member or the operator.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the first member has a collision part that collides with either the base member or the operator, and if the collision part is damaged, the first Since other parts of the member collide with the base member or the manipulator, the transmission of vibrations to the manipulator can be ensured. That is, even if the collision portion is damaged, the player can be made aware that the manipulator has been displaced to the predetermined position.

In any one of the game machines C5 to C7, the operator is displaceable between a first position where it can contact the first member and a second position where it does not contact the first member. A member is provided, and when the operator is displaced in the first direction, the displacement member is arranged at the first position, and the operator is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. A game machine C8, wherein the displacement member is arranged at the second position when the displacement member is placed at the second position.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C5 to C7, the operator has a first position where it can contact the first member and a second position where it does not contact the first member. position, and when the manipulator is displaced in a first direction, the displacement member is disposed at the first position and the manipulator moves in a second direction opposite to the first direction. When displaced in the direction, the displacement member is arranged at the second position. Therefore, the operational feeling is changed only when the operator is displaced in the first direction, and when the operator is displaced in the second direction, The operation feeling can be left unchanged. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in the feeling of operation when displacing the manipulator in any direction, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine C8, the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by contacting the first member when the operator is displaced in the second direction. Characterized game machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by being brought into contact with the first member when the operator is displaced in the second direction. Since it is displaced, there is no need to separately provide a structure for displacing the displacement member, and such a structure can also be used for the first member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C9, the base member has an engagement piece that displaces the displacement member from the second position to the first position when the manipulator is arranged at the terminal end in the second direction. Gaming machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the base member engages to displace the displacement member from the second position to the first position when the manipulator is arranged at the end in the second direction. Since the piece is provided, the displacement member can be brought into contact with the first member when the operator is displaced in the first direction.

A game machine C11 in the game machine C10, wherein the engaging piece is elastically deformable.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effects of the game machine C10, the engagement piece is formed to be elastically deformable. Even if the piece collides, the impact caused by the collision can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the engaging piece. Therefore, breakage of the displacement member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with an operator that can be displaced from a first position to a second position by a player's operation, an operation in a first direction or an operation in a second direction different from the first direction is performed. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the manipulator is displaced from the first position to the second position in any direction of operation.

Here, a game machine having an operator is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-29609). Examples of the manipulator include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

However, the conventional game machine illustrated above has a problem that the operational feeling is monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the operator moves from the first position to the first position in either direction of the operation in the first direction or in the second direction which is different from the first direction. Since it is displaced to two positions, the player can arbitrarily select the type of operation. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in operational feeling.

In the game machine D1, the operator is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and the operator is displaced from the second position to the third position by the operation in the second direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that displacement of the manipulator from the second position to the third position is restricted in the operation in the first direction.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the operation in the second direction displaces the operator from the second position to the third position, and the operation in the first direction moves the operator to the second position. Since the displacement from the position to the third position is restricted, the operation of displacing the manipulator from the first position to the third position can be complicated (formation of a mixture of one-step operation and two-step operation). That is, in the operation in the first direction, the displacement of the operator from the first position to the third position cannot be completed (after that, it is necessary to further perform the operation in the second direction at the second position). If the operation is in two directions, the displacement of the manipulator from the first position to the third position can be completed in one operation.

In the gaming machine D1, the operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and is operated in the third direction, which is different from both the first direction and the second direction. The operator is displaced from the second position to the third position, and the displacement of the operator from the second position to the third position is restricted in the operations in the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the operator moves from the second position to the third position by operating in the third direction, which is different from both the first direction and the second direction. Since displacement of the manipulator from the second position to the third position is regulated in operations in the first direction and the second direction, an operation for displacing the manipulator from the first position to the third position is , can require a two-step operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operational feeling from becoming monotonous. In addition, it is possible to prevent the manipulator from being carelessly displaced (operated) from the second position to the third position.

That is, after the manipulator is displaced from the first position to the second position by the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, it is then moved in the third direction, which is different from the first direction or the second direction. The manipulator cannot be displaced to the third position unless it is operated in the direction.

In any one of game machines D1 to D3, one of the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction is an operation to rotate the operator, and the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction. The other is an operation for linearly moving the operator, a game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, one of the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction is the operation of rotating the operator, and the operation in the first direction Alternatively, since the other of the operations in the second direction is an operation for linearly moving the manipulator, the difference in the operation direction can be made remarkable. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in operational feeling due to operations in different directions clearer.

In the game machine D4, the direction of the rotational axis of rotation in one of the operations in the first direction and the operations in the second direction, and the direction of translation in the other of the operations in the first direction and the operations in the second direction are parallel to each other.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the direction of the rotational axis of rotation in one of the first direction operation and the second direction operation and the direction of the first direction operation or the second direction operation Since the direction of linear motion on the other side is parallel, the manipulator can be easily displaced from the first position to the second position in both the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction.

In the gaming machine D5, a base member on which the manipulator is displaceably arranged, a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the manipulator, and a guide portion formed on the other of the base member or the manipulator and the a guided portion guided along the guiding portion, and the manipulator is displaced from at least the first position to the second position by guiding the guided portion along the guiding portion. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the base member on which the operator is displaceably disposed, the guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operator, and the base member or the operator. and a guided portion formed on the other side of the element and guided along the guide portion, and the operator is displaced from at least the first position to the second position by guiding the guided portion along the guide portion. Therefore, the structure can be simplified. Further, the guide portion (guide surface) on which the guided portion is guided can be made different between the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction (for example, linear movement and rotation). As a result, for example, by varying the shape of the guide portion (guide surface), it is possible to vary the displacement mode and operational feeling of the manipulator.

The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the front surface of the manipulator is arranged at a position overlapping the rotation axis when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of rotation in one of the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction. A game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the front surface of the operating element overlaps the rotation axis when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of rotation in one of the first direction operation and the second direction operation. Since it is arranged, it is possible to make it difficult to form a force component in a direction that tilts the manipulator with respect to the rotation axis when the manipulator is pushed. Therefore, the push-operated operating element can be smoothly linearly moved.

In the game machine D6 or D7, when viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotational axis of rotation in one of the operations in the first direction and the operation in the second direction, the facing side surfaces of the manipulators overlap the rotational axis. A game machine D8, characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6 or D7, in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of rotation in either the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, the operation is performed at a position overlapping the rotation axis. Since the opposing side surfaces of the child are arranged respectively, the opposing side surfaces of the manipulator can be used as handles, and the opposing side surfaces can be gripped to facilitate rotation of the manipulator.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
In a game machine provided with an operator that is displaced by being operated in one direction by a player, a first action and a second action different from the first action are formed in the operator by the operation in the one direction. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that:

Here, a game machine having an operator is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-29609). Examples of the manipulator include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the manipulator is only operated in one direction to form one action, and there is a problem that it is difficult to add interest to the manipulation of the manipulator.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, by operating in one direction, a first action and a second action different from the first action are formed in the operator, thereby adding interest to the operation of the operator. be able to.

Note that the operation in one direction includes, for example, a push-in operation for pressing the operator, a pull-out (pull-out) operation for pulling the operator, a tilting operation for tilting the operator, a slide operation for sliding the operator, and a rotating operation for the operator. A rotation operation, an operation combining these operations, and the like are exemplified. In addition, as modes of the first motion and the second motion, there are, for example, motions of displacement along a straight line (linear displacement), motions of displacement along a curve (curve displacement), motions of rotating about an axis, and the like. An operation that performs displacement combining displacements is exemplified.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that at least one mode of the first action or the second action is changed during the operation in the one direction.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, at least one of the first action and the second action is changed in the middle of the operation in one direction, so that the operation of the operator is interesting. can give.

As a mode of the gaming machine E2, for example, as a first mode, a pushing operation (operation in one direction) causes a linear displacement motion (first motion) and a rotating motion (second motion) to be performed by the manipulator. In the second mode, the direction of rotation of the manipulator (second motion) is changed to the opposite direction (for example, from right to left) during the pressing operation. As a mode of (1), a pushing operation (an operation in one direction) causes a linearly displacing action (first action) and a rotating action (second action) to be formed in the operator, and the pushing operation A third mode in which the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the operator per unit pressing amount of the pressing operation is increased or decreased (including when the rotation amount is 0) is a rotation operation ( operation in one direction), a motion of linear displacement (first motion) and a motion of rotation (second motion) are formed in the manipulator. Modes in which the amount of linear displacement of the manipulator per unit rotation angle is increased or decreased (including those in which the amount of linear displacement is 0) are exemplified.

A game machine E3 characterized in that one of the first action and the second action is not performed in the middle of the operation in the one direction in the game machine E1 or E2.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, one of the first action and the second action is not performed during the operation in one direction, so that the operation of the operator is interesting. can give

Note that the middle of the operation in one direction may be any timing within the range of the operation. In other words, one of the first action and the second action may not be formed before or after the first action and the second action are formed.

Therefore, as a mode of the game machine E3, for example, as a first mode, in the first half of the push-in operation (operation in one direction), a motion of linear displacement (first motion) and a rotating motion (second motion) is formed in the manipulator, and in the second half of the pushing operation, only the action of linear displacement (first action) is formed in the manipulator, and the action of rotation (second action) is not formed. As a mode, in the first half of the pushing operation (operation in one direction), only the operation of linear displacement (first operation) is formed in the operator, and the rotating operation (second operation) is not formed, and the pushing operation In the latter half of 2, a mode in which a linear displacement motion (first motion) and a rotating motion (second motion) are formed in the manipulator is exemplified.

In any one of game machines E1 to E3, a base member on which the operator is displaceably arranged is provided, and the operator is a base member guided by the base member and rotatably connected to the base member. A gaming machine E4 characterized by comprising an operated member which is a part operated by a player.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, the operation element is provided with a base member displaceable, and the operation element is guided by the base member and rotated by the base member. Since it is provided with the to-be-operated member which is connected so as to be capable of being operated by the player, it is possible to improve the feeling of operation when the to-be-operated member is operated.

For example, in a mode in which a push operation (operation in one direction) causes a linear displacement motion (first motion) and a rotating motion (second motion) to be formed in the manipulator, the second motion (rotation) is formed. With formation, the manipulator is rotated relative to the palm of the operator's hand. As a result, the palm of the hand is rubbed by the manipulator, resulting in a decrease in operational feeling.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, since the operated member is rotatably connected to the base member, the pushing operation (operation in one direction) causes linear displacement (first operation) and rotation. It is possible to prevent the operated member from rotating with respect to the palm of the player's hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the palm from being rubbed by the manipulator and improve the operational feeling.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a base member on which the operator is displaceably arranged, a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operator, and the base member or the operator. A guided portion formed on the other side and guided along the guide portion, wherein the manipulator is displaced by guiding the guided portion along the guide portion. Machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, a base member on which the operator is displaceably disposed, and a guide part formed on either the base member or the operator. and a guided portion formed on the other of the base member and the manipulator and guided along the guide portion. The structure can be simplified while simultaneously forming the first motion and the second motion.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, wherein a guided portion formed on one of the base member or the displacement member, and the base member or the displacement member and a guide portion formed on the other side of the guide portion for guiding the guided portion, wherein the guided portion is guided through different regions of the guide portion according to the displacement state of the displacement member. Game machine F1.

Here, a base member and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member are provided, and a pin projecting from the displacement member slides along a groove formed in the base member, A game machine that defines the displacement mode of a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130539).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the same area is guided regardless of the displacement state of the displacement member, the load concentrates on that area, resulting in a problem of reduced durability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a guided portion formed on one of the base member and the displacement member and a guide portion formed on the other of the base member and the displacement member for guiding the guided portion are provided. Since the guide portion is guided through different regions of the guide portion according to the displacement state of the displacement member, the regions that receive the load can be distributed, and concentration of the load on a part of the region can be suppressed. As a result, durability can be improved.

Examples of the displacement state of the displacement member include the displacement direction of the displacement member and the mode of external force acting on the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and the area of the guide portion in which the guided portion is guided is such that the displacement member is positioned at the first position. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that a case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position differs from a case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the region of the guiding portion where the guided portion is guided is Since the case where the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position differs from the case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position, it is possible to disperse the areas that receive the load. Concentration of load can be suppressed. As a result, durability can be improved.

In this way, when the displacement member reciprocates between the first position and the second position, the displacement member is alternately displaced between the outward and return paths, so that the region of the guiding portion where the guided portion is guided is are different between the outward path and the return path of the displacement member, the areas receiving the load can be efficiently distributed. As a result, it is particularly effective in improving durability.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement member is formed to be operable by the player in either of a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the guided portion is guided. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the region of the guide portion differs between when the displacement member is operated in the first direction and when the displacement member is operated in the second direction.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement member is formed to be operable by the player in either of the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. Since the region of the guiding portion where the guided portion is guided differs depending on whether the displacement member is operated in the first direction or in the second direction, the regions receiving the load can be dispersed. , it is possible to suppress the concentration of the load on a part of the area. As a result, durability can be improved.

Thus, when the displacement member is formed as an operator operated by the player and can be operated in either of the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction, the game state is established. Since the same operation (operation direction) is unlikely to be repeated, the area of the guiding portion where the guided portion is guided can be changed by the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction. By making them different, the areas receiving the load can be efficiently distributed. As a result, it is particularly effective in improving durability.

In the gaming machine F2, a first member and a second member are provided, and the guide portion is a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. is formed on the first member, and a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position is formed on the second member Game machine F4 to play.

In the game machine F3, a first member and a second member are provided, and the guide portion has a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is operated in the first direction. and a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is operated in the second direction is formed in the second member.

According to the game machine F4 or F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, the guide portion is provided when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position or operated in the first direction. A region in which the guiding portion is guided is formed in the first member, and a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position or operated in the second direction is the first member. Since it is formed by two members, the replacement cost can be reduced.

That is, when the guide portion is formed in one member, even if part of the region of the guide portion is damaged or worn, the entire one member must be replaced. On the other hand, according to the game machine F4 or F5, when a part of the area is damaged or worn, only one member (one of the first member or the second member) forming the area is replaced. This eliminates the need to replace the entire member. Therefore, the replacement cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, by forming the guide portion from the first member and the second member in this way, if only one region is likely to be damaged or worn, one member (the first member or the second member) forming that region can be used. Only one of the members) can be made of a material that is more durable than the other member (the other of the first member or the second member). As a result, it is possible to improve the durability while reducing the material cost.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 300 (Guide Unit 350) as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a first member having a projected guided portion and a second member having a groove-shaped guide portion for guiding the guided portion, the second member comprises a base member and a base member. A gaming machine G1, further comprising a connecting member connected to the member, wherein the guide portion is formed by the base member and the connecting member.

Here, a base member and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member are provided, and a pin projecting from the displacement member slides along a groove formed in the base member, A game machine that defines the displacement mode of a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130539).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if other members are present when assembling the base member and the displacement member, it is difficult to assemble (insert the pin into the groove) while avoiding interference with the other members. may be required. In this case, since it is necessary to work while avoiding interference with other members, the shapes of the displacement member, the base member, and other members are limited, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second member includes the base member and the connecting member connected to the base member, and the guide portion is formed by the base member and the connecting member. Alternatively, after placing the first member on one of the connecting members, the other of the base member or the connecting member can be connected to one side to assemble the whole. Therefore, interference with other members can be made difficult to occur. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the gaming machine G1, the guide portion includes a guide surface along the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and an end surface defining an end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided. A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the boundary between is formed at the terminal surface or at the connecting portion between the terminal surface and the guide surface.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the guide portion has a guide surface along the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and an end surface that defines the end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided. Since the boundary between the base member and the connecting member is formed on the terminal surface or the connection portion between the terminal surface and the guide surface, the boundary where a step is likely to be formed due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances can be formed on the guided portion. can be avoided from passing through. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of impact and abrasion when the guided portion passes through the step. As a result, the guided portion can be displaced smoothly, and durability can be improved.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the guide portion includes a guide surface along a direction in which the guided portion is guided, and an end surface that defines an end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and the guide surface comprises: A gaming machine comprising a first guide surface and a second guide surface that are arranged to face each other, wherein the first guide surface is formed by the base member, and the second guide surface is formed by the connecting member. G3.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the guide portion has a guide surface along the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and an end surface that defines the end of the direction in which the guided portion is guided. and the guide surface includes a first guide surface and a second guide surface that are arranged to face each other, and the first guide surface is formed by the base member and the second guide surface is formed by the connecting member. The guide surface and the second guide surface can be formed from separate members. As a result, the materials of the first guide surface and the second guide surface can be made different according to the characteristics required for the first guide surface and the second guide surface. Moreover, when changing the shape of the first guide surface or the second guide surface, it is sufficient to change only one member, and it is not necessary to change the whole.

In the game machine G3, the terminal surface includes a first terminal surface that defines the terminal on one side in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and a second terminal surface that defines the terminal on the other side in the direction in which the guided portion is guided. and a terminal surface, wherein the first terminal surface and the second terminal surface are formed by one of the base member and the connecting member.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the end surface includes the first end surface that defines one end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and the other end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided. and a second terminal surface that defines the terminal end of the side, and the first terminal surface and the second terminal surface are formed by one of the base member and the connecting member, so that easily damaged parts can be consolidated into one part. , the cost of replacing parts can be reduced. That is, the surface (portion) that defines the end of the direction in which the guided portion is guided is likely to be damaged due to the collision of the guided portion. It suffices to replace only one of the base member and the connecting member, eliminating the need to replace the whole.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the circumference of the outer surface formed along the first direction of the first member is surrounded by the second member, and the guided portion protrudes from the outer surface of the first member. The guide portion is formed on the inner surface of the connecting member, and the base member and the connecting member are divided in the first direction.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the periphery of the outer surface formed along the first direction of the first member is surrounded by the second member, and the guided portion is , the guide portion is formed on the inner surface of the connecting member, and the base member and the connecting member are divided in the first direction, so that the base member and the connecting member are formed in a continuous shape (annular shape). ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the members (the base member and the connecting member) that require rigidity in order to form the guiding portion for guiding the guided portion. Further, by dividing the base member and the connecting member, it is possible to facilitate the formation (mold cutting) of the guide portion.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the first member is formed to be displaceable from a first position to a second position by a player's operation, and an operation in the first direction moves the first member from the first position. When the guided portion is displaced to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the first guide surface, and the first member is moved in the second direction by the operation in the second direction different from the first direction. The game machine G6 is characterized in that the guided portion is guided by the second guide surface when displaced from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, the first member is formed to be displaceable from the first position to the second position by the player's operation, and the first member can be moved to the first position by the operation in the first direction. When the first member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the first guide surface, and the first member is displaced by the operation in the second direction which is different from the first direction. When the guided portion is displaced from the first position to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the second guide surface. A suitable (suitable) guide surface (shape and material) can be adopted. Accordingly, for example, by making the shape and material of the first guide surface and the second guide surface different, the operational feeling can be made different. Alternatively, by adopting a material with high wear resistance and impact resistance on the side where wear and impact is large, and using a low-cost material on the side where wear and impact are small. , can achieve improved durability and reduced product cost.

A gaming machine K1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5 and G1 to G6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5 and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5 and G1 to G6, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine is known in which a displacement member is slidably disposed on a base member (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-130539).
However, the game machine illustrated above has a problem that assembly is complicated.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that can be easily assembled.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and holding means for holding the displacement member on the base member. wherein the holding means comprises an elastic portion elastically deformable on one of the base member and the displacement member, and the displacement member is held by the base member by the elastic portion. .
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the displacement member is held by the base member by the elastic portion by being displaced in one direction.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the holding means is disposed on one of the base member and the displacement member and is engageable with the other of the base member and the displacement member. and the displacement member is displaced in one direction with the other of the base member and the displacement member engaged with the engagement portion, so that the base member It is held by the elastic portion.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, assembly can be facilitated.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, assembly can be facilitated.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, assembly can be facilitated.
<Sign>
10 slot machine (gaming machine)
300 displacement unit (manipulator)
310 ring member (base member)
320, 8320, 10320 operation unit (manipulator, displacement member, first member)
330, 10330 grasping unit (manipulator, displacement member)
10335 operator (operator, base member, displacement member)
10336 connecting member (manipulator, operated member, displacement member)
340, 8340 rotation unit (manipulator, displacement member, first member)
342 back side member (displacement member, first member)
343 shaft member (guided portion)
344 guided member (guided portion)
350, 8350, 9350, 11350, 12350, 13350, 14350, 15350 guide unit (base member, second member)
351, 8351, 9351, 11351, 12351, 13351, 14351, 15351 guide groove (guide part)
351a first guide surface (guide surface, end surface, first guide surface, second guide surface, first end surface, second end surface)
351b, 14351b, 15351b second guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351c, 8351c third guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351d fourth guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351e, 12351e first end (terminal surface, first terminal surface, second terminal surface)
351f, 13351f, 14351f second end (terminal surface, first terminal surface, second terminal surface)
11351g fifth guide surface (guide surface, end surface, first guide surface, second guide surface, first end surface, second end surface)
11351h Sixth guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
14351i, 15351i third end (terminal surface, first terminal surface, second terminal surface)
9351k back recessed portion (guide surface, terminal surface, first guide surface, second guide surface, first terminal surface, second terminal surface)
8351m accommodation section (termination surface, first termination surface, second termination surface)
360, 11360 front side guide unit (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
362 second annular member (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
370 back side guide unit (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
391, 2391, 3391, 4391, 5391, 6391, 7391 base unit (base member)
392, 2392, 3392, 4392, 5392, 6392, 7392 base member (base member)
392a, 2392a, 3392a, 4392a, 5392a, 6392a, 7392a base plate (base member)
5392a2 sliding groove (opening)
392d1 , 2392d1, 3392d1, 4392d1 inner first engaging piece (holding means, protrusion)
392d2 inner second engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
3392d3 inner first locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
3392d4 inner second locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
392e1 , 2392e1 outer first engaging piece (holding means, protrusion)
392e2 , 2392e2 outer second engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
3392e3 , 4392e3 Outer first locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
3392e4 , 4392e4 outer second locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
392f, 2392f, 3392f, 6392f, 7392f Regulating piece (holding means, elastic portion, engaging piece)
393 leaf spring (first member)
393a protrusion (collision part)
395, 2395, 4395, 5395, 7395 displacement unit (displacement member, rack, operator)
396, 2396, 4396, 5396 first displacement member (displacement member, rack, operator, first member)
396d1, 2396d1 inner first recess (recess)
396d2, 2396d2 inner second recessed portion (recessed portion)
396e, 2396e Outer recess (recess)
5396m hook (elastic part, engaging part)
397, 7397 second displacement member (displacement member)

10 slot machine (gaming machine )
3 20, 8320, 10320 Operation unit (displacement means)
3 43 Shaft member (guided portion)
344 guided member (guided portion)
350, 8350, 9350, 11350, 12350, 13350, 14350, 15350 Guide unit (base means)
351, 8351, 9351, 11351, 12351, 13351, 14351, 15351 Guide groove (guide portion )

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising base means and displacement means displaceably disposed on the base means,
a guided portion formed on one of the base means and the displacement means;
a guide portion that is formed on the other of the base means or the displacement means and guides the guided portion;
The displacement means is displaced in a predetermined direction having a directional component in the first direction and a directional component in the second direction by operation in either of a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. By doing so, it is formed to be displaceable from the first position to the second position,
The guided portion is configured such that the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position by an operation in the first direction, and the displacement means is moved to the first position by an operation in the second direction. to the second position . position to the second position, the area of the guide portion where the guided portion is guided by the operation in the first direction or the guided portion by the operation in the second direction. is formed so as to be able to abut on the region of the guide portion guided by the guide portion,
The displacement means is displaced in the predetermined direction also by operating the displacement means in the second direction while operating the displacement means in the first direction, thereby moving the displacement means in the first direction or the second direction. formed to be displaceable from the first position to the second position along substantially the same trajectory as when operated in any direction;
A gaming machine, wherein at least a central portion of an operation portion of the displacement means is formed in a curved shape as viewed from an operation direction when the displacement means is operated in one of the first direction and the second direction.

Images